WO2020037469A1 - Interface display method and electronic device - Google Patents

Interface display method and electronic device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2020037469A1
WO2020037469A1 PCT/CN2018/101382 CN2018101382W WO2020037469A1 WO 2020037469 A1 WO2020037469 A1 WO 2020037469A1 CN 2018101382 W CN2018101382 W CN 2018101382W WO 2020037469 A1 WO2020037469 A1 WO 2020037469A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
interface
sub
electronic device
gui
projection area
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2018/101382
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
吴奇强
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Priority to PCT/CN2018/101382 priority Critical patent/WO2020037469A1/en
Priority to CN201880086258.4A priority patent/CN111566606B/en
Publication of WO2020037469A1 publication Critical patent/WO2020037469A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/048Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI]
    • G06F3/0481Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] based on specific properties of the displayed interaction object or a metaphor-based environment, e.g. interaction with desktop elements like windows or icons, or assisted by a cursor's changing behaviour or appearance

Definitions

  • This embodiment relates to the field of electronic devices, and in particular, to a display method of an interface and an electronic device.
  • touch screen mobile phones are currently the most widely used.
  • touch screen size of touch screen mobile phones is also getting larger and larger, from the popular 3 inches, to 4 inches, to 5 inches, 6 inches, etc. in the early days.
  • the large-screen touch-screen mobile phones as shown in FIG. 1, when the user holds the mobile phone with one hand (left hand or right hand), since the area accessible by the user's thumb (such as the fan-shaped area shown in FIG. 1) is very Limited, causing the content displayed on the touch screen (such as content outside the fan-shaped area shown in FIG. 1) to be very difficult for the user to operate.
  • the content displayed on the touch screen of the mobile phone can be reduced by a certain ratio and displayed in a specific area of the touch screen, so that the user's thumb can touch more of the display on the touch screen.
  • Content For example, as shown in FIG. 2A, when the user holds the mobile phone with his left hand, the mobile phone can reduce the content currently displayed on the touch screen by a certain ratio and display it in the lower left corner of the touch screen. As shown in FIG. 2B, when the user holds the mobile phone with his right hand , The mobile phone can reduce the content currently displayed on the touch screen by a certain ratio and display it in the lower right corner area of the touch screen.
  • a problem existing in the prior art is that when a user holds a mobile phone with one hand, the content displayed on the touch screen is reduced by a certain proportion and displayed in a specific area of the touch screen. In some areas, the user's finger cannot be reached. For example, the shaded area shown in FIG. 2A or 2B.
  • This embodiment provides an interface display method and an electronic device, which solves a problem that it is difficult to operate a part of content displayed on a touch screen when a user holds a mobile phone with one hand.
  • this embodiment provides a method for displaying an interface.
  • the method may be implemented in an electronic device having a touch screen.
  • the method may include: the electronic device displays a first graphic of a first application on the touch screen of the electronic device.
  • a user interface GUI
  • the electronic device determines a projection area, and the projection area may be all or part of the area accessible by a finger when the user operates the electronic device with one hand.
  • Area the electronic device displays a first target interface in the projection area, the first target interface is superimposed and displayed on the first GUI, and the content of the first target interface is the same as the content of the first sub-interface.
  • the electronic device when the user operates the electronic device with one hand, the electronic device can project one of the sub-interfaces in the GUI currently displayed on the touch screen of the electronic device onto an area accessible to the user's finger on the touch screen, that is, the electronic device.
  • a target interface is displayed in the projection area, the target interface is superimposed on the currently displayed GUI, and the content of the target interface is the same as the content of the sub-interface, so that the user can realize that the finger on the touch screen cannot be reached in the projection area.
  • the operation of the content displayed on the area This reduces the difficulty for the user to operate part of the content displayed on the touch screen with one hand, improves the use efficiency of the electronic device, and also improves the user experience.
  • the method for displaying the interface may further include: the electronic device divides the first GUI into N 1 sub-interfaces, and the N 1 sub-interfaces include the first sub-interfaces.
  • the electronic device divides the GUI currently displayed on the touch screen into a plurality of sub-interfaces, and projects the sub-interfaces in the projection area, so that the content displayed in the area that cannot be touched by the user's finger can be displayed in the area that can be touched by the user's finger. in.
  • the user can conveniently operate the content displayed on the area on the touch screen that cannot be reached by a finger.
  • the foregoing electronic device displays the first target interface in the projection area, which may be replaced by: the electronic device displays the controls included in the first target interface in the projection area.
  • the electronic device projects a control included in one of the sub-interfaces of the GUI currently displayed on the touch screen of the electronic device into an area reachable by a user's finger on the touch screen, so that the user can realize that the finger on the touch screen cannot be reached in the projection area.
  • the operation of the content displayed on the area improves the use efficiency of the electronic device and also improves the user experience.
  • the display method of the interface may further include: when the electronic device detects a touch operation with respect to the first control in the projection area, in response to the touch operation, the electronic device may display the first operation on the touch screen.
  • An application's second GUI which is the same as the GUI displayed by the electronic device in response to a user's touch operation on the first control in the first sub-interface.
  • the user's touch operation in the projection area can be mapped to the user's touch operation at the same position in the first sub-interface, thereby realizing the operation of the area that cannot be touched by the finger when the one-hand operation is performed in the projection area; if the second The number of controls included in the GUI is less than a predetermined threshold.
  • the electronic device displays at least one control in the above-mentioned projection area.
  • the at least one control is superimposed and displayed on the second GUI.
  • At least one control is the same as the controls included in the second GUI.
  • the GUI currently displayed on the touch screen of the electronic device includes a small number of controls, the GUI is not divided, but all controls included in the second GUI are projected on the projection area, which not only ensures that the user can operate with one hand Conveniently operate areas that are not reachable by fingers, without affecting the user's visual experience.
  • the display method of the interface may further include: when the electronic device detects a touch operation with respect to the second control in the projection area, in response to the touch operation, the electronic device may display the first operation on the touch screen.
  • the third GUI of the two applications which is the same as the GUI displayed by the electronic device in response to the user's touch operation on the second control in the first sub-interface; if the third GUI includes fewer controls than the first GUI In the control included in the electronic device, the third GUI is divided into N 2 sub-interfaces, and the N 2 sub-interfaces include the second sub-interface, and N 2 is less than N 1 ; the electronic device displays a second target interface in the projection area, and the second The target interface is superimposed and displayed on the third GUI, and the content of the second target interface is the same as that of the second sub-interface.
  • the electronic device can divide the GUI according to the difference in the number of controls included in the GUI currently displayed on the touch screen. For example, the fewer controls the GUI includes, the fewer the number of sub-interfaces can be obtained, making the interface division of the electronic device more suitable.
  • the characteristics of the GUI displayed on the touch screen make electronic devices more intelligent and improve the user experience.
  • the first GUI may further include a third sub-interface
  • the display method of the interface may further include: when the electronic device detects a sliding operation in the projection area, in response to the sliding operation, The electronic device may display a third target interface in the projection area, and the third target interface is superimposed and displayed on the first GUI, and the content of the third target interface is the same as that of the third sub-interface. In this way, it is convenient for the user to operate each sub-interface in the first GUI in the projection area, and the user experience is improved.
  • the projection area coincides with the area where one of the N 1 sub-interfaces is located; or the size of the first target interface is larger than the size of the first sub-interface; or the display effect of the first sub-interface is the same as The display effect of other sub-interfaces in the first GUI is different; or the display effect of the first target interface is the same as that of the first sub-interface, and the display effect of the first target interface is different from the display effect of other sub-interfaces in the first GUI ; Or the size of the first target interface is the same as the size of the first sub-interface, and the size of the first sub-interface is different from that of other sub-interfaces in the first GUI; or after the first GUI is divided into N 1 sub-interfaces , The outline of the sub-interface is superimposed and displayed on the first GUI; or the operating frequency of the area where the first sub-interface is located is higher than that of the other sub-interfaces in the first GUI; or the controls included in the first
  • this embodiment provides a method for displaying an interface.
  • the method may be implemented in an electronic device having a touch screen.
  • the method may include:
  • the electronic device displays the first GUI of the first application on the touch screen.
  • the electronic device can determine a projection area in response to the operation, and the projection area can be used by the user to operate the electronic device with one hand.
  • the electronic device divides the above-mentioned first GUI into N 1 sub-interfaces, the N 1 sub-interfaces including the first sub-interface, and the electronic device displays a first target interface in the projection area, the first The target interface is superimposed and displayed on the first GUI, and the content of the first target interface is the same as that of the first sub-interface;
  • the electronic device detects a first touch operation with respect to the first control in the projection area, it responds to For the first touch operation, the electronic device displays the second GUI of the first application on the touch screen, and the second GUI is the same as the GUI displayed by the electronic device in response to the user's touch operation on the first control in the first sub-interface.
  • the number of controls in the second GUI is less than a predetermined threshold; the electronic device displays at least one control in the projection area, and the at least one control is superimposed on the display. Above the second GUI, the at least one control is identical to the controls included in the second GUI, and the at least one control includes the second control; the electronic device detects a second touch for the second control in the projection area In operation, in response to the second touch operation, a third GUI of the second application is displayed on the touch screen, and the third GUI and the electronic device are displayed in response to a user's touch operation on the second control in the second GUI.
  • the GUI is the same.
  • the control included in the third GUI is less than the control included in the first GUI.
  • the electronic device divides the third GUI into N 2 sub-interfaces.
  • the N 2 sub-interfaces include the second sub-interface, and N 2 is less than N 1 .
  • the electronic device displays a second target interface in the projection area, the second target interface is superimposed and displayed on the third GUI, and the content of the second target interface is the same as that of the second sub-interface.
  • the display method of the interface may further include: when the electronic device detects a third touch operation on the third control in the projection area. In response to the third touch operation, the electronic device displays a fourth GUI on the touch screen; the electronic device determines whether to determine the projection area according to the content of the fourth GUI. If the projection area is to be determined, the electronic device may determine the projection area and change the fourth area.
  • the GUI is divided into N 3 sub-interfaces.
  • the N 3 sub-interfaces include a third sub-interface, and a third target interface is displayed in the projection area.
  • the third target interface is superimposed on the fourth GUI, and the content of the third target interface is displayed. The content is the same as that of the third sub-interface; if the projection area is not determined, the electronic device may not divide the fourth GUI, that is, display the fourth GUI normally.
  • the electronic device when the user operates the electronic device with one hand, the electronic device can project one of the sub-interfaces in the GUI currently displayed on the touch screen of the electronic device onto an area accessible to the user's finger on the touch screen, that is, the electronic device A target interface is displayed in the projection area, the target interface is superimposed on the currently displayed GUI, and the content of the target interface is the same as the content of the sub-interface, so that the user can realize that the finger on the touch screen cannot be reached in the projection area.
  • the operation of the content displayed on the area This reduces the difficulty for the user to operate part of the content displayed on the touch screen with one hand, improves the use efficiency of the electronic device, and can also improve the user experience.
  • the electronic device can divide or not divide the GUI by using a division scheme suitable for the characteristics of the GUI, so that the interface division of the electronic device is more intelligent, and the user is improved.
  • a division scheme suitable for the characteristics of the GUI so that the interface division of the electronic device is more intelligent, and the user is improved.
  • this embodiment provides an electronic device.
  • the electronic device may include a display unit for displaying a first GUI of a first application program, the first GUI including a first sub-interface, and an input unit for receiving Turn on the operation of the one-handed operation mode; the determining unit is used to determine a projection area in response to the operation received by the input unit, and the projection area is an area that can be touched by a finger when the user operates the electronic device with one hand; A first target interface is displayed in the projection area, and the first target interface is superimposed and displayed on the first GUI, and the content of the first target interface is the same as that of the first sub-interface.
  • the electronic device may further include a dividing unit configured to divide the first GUI into N 1 sub-interfaces, and the N 1 sub-interfaces include the first sub-interface.
  • the display unit is specifically configured to display controls included in the first target interface in a projection area.
  • the input unit is further configured to receive a touch operation for the first control in the projection area; the display unit is further configured to display the first application program's response in response to the touch operation received by the input unit.
  • the second GUI The number of controls included in the second GUI is less than a predetermined threshold, and at least one control is displayed in the projection area. The at least one control is superimposed on the second GUI, and the at least one control and the control included in the second GUI are One is the same.
  • the input unit is further configured to receive a touch operation with respect to the second control in the projection area; the display unit is further configured to display the second application program ’s response to the touch operation received by the input unit.
  • the third GUI includes fewer controls than the first GUI; the dividing unit is further configured to divide the third GUI into N 2 sub-interfaces, the N 2 sub-interfaces including the second sub-interface, N 2 is less than N 1 ; the display unit is further configured to display a second target interface in the projection area, the second target interface is superimposed and displayed on the third GUI, and the content of the second target interface is the same as that of the second sub-interface.
  • the first GUI may further include a third sub-interface; the input unit is further configured to receive a sliding operation in the projection area; and the display unit is further configured to respond to the sliding received by the input unit
  • a third target interface is displayed in the projection area.
  • the third target interface is superimposed and displayed on the first GUI, and the content of the third target interface is the same as that of the third sub-interface.
  • the projection area coincides with the area where one of the N 1 sub-interfaces is located; or the size of the first target interface is larger than the size of the first sub-interface; or the display effect of the first sub-interface is the same as The display effect of other sub-interfaces in the first GUI is different; or the display effect of the first target interface is the same as that of the first sub-interface, and the display effect of the first target interface is different from the display effect of other sub-interfaces in the first GUI ; Or the size of the first target interface is the same as the size of the first sub-interface, and the size of the first sub-interface is different from that of other sub-interfaces in the first GUI; or after the first GUI is divided into N 1 sub-interfaces , The outline of the sub-interface is superimposed and displayed on the first GUI; or the operating frequency of the area where the first sub-interface is located is higher than that of the other sub-interfaces in the first GUI; or the controls included in the first
  • this embodiment provides an electronic device, which may include: one or more processors, a memory, a touch screen, and one or more computer programs; one or more processors, a memory, a touch screen, and one or more Multiple computer programs are connected through one or more communication buses; the touch screen includes a touch-sensitive surface and a display screen; one or more computer programs are stored in memory and configured to be executed by one or more processors; one or more Each computer program includes instructions that can be used to execute the method for displaying an interface according to the first aspect or any possible implementation of the first aspect.
  • this embodiment provides a computer storage medium including computer instructions that, when the computer instructions run on an electronic device, cause the electronic device to execute any of the first aspect or a possible implementation manner of the first aspect.
  • this embodiment provides a computer program product that, when the computer program product runs on a computer, causes the computer to perform display of an interface as described in the first aspect or any possible implementation manner of the first aspect. method.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of some graphical user interfaces displayed on a mobile phone in some embodiments
  • 2A-2B are schematic diagrams of some graphical user interfaces displayed on a mobile phone in other embodiments.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device 300 according to this embodiment.
  • FIG. 4 is a software structural block diagram of an electronic device 300 according to this embodiment.
  • 5A-5B are schematic diagrams of some graphical user interfaces displayed on the electronic device in this embodiment.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of some other graphical user interfaces displayed on the electronic device in this embodiment.
  • FIGS. 7A-7E are schematic diagrams of other graphical user interfaces displayed on the electronic device in this embodiment.
  • 8A-8B are schematic diagrams of other graphical user interfaces displayed on the electronic device in this embodiment.
  • 9A-9D are schematic diagrams of other graphical user interfaces displayed on the electronic device in this embodiment.
  • 10A-10B are schematic diagrams of other graphical user interfaces displayed on the electronic device in this embodiment.
  • 11A-11B are schematic diagrams of other graphical user interfaces displayed on the electronic device in this embodiment.
  • 12A-12B are schematic diagrams of other graphical user interfaces displayed on the electronic device in this embodiment.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of another graphical user interface displayed on the electronic device in this embodiment.
  • 14A-14B are schematic diagrams of other graphical user interfaces displayed on the electronic device in this embodiment.
  • 15 is a schematic diagram of another graphical user interface displayed on the electronic device in this embodiment.
  • 16A-16C are schematic diagrams of other graphical user interfaces displayed on the electronic device in this embodiment.
  • 17 is a schematic flowchart of a method for displaying an interface according to this embodiment.
  • 21 is a schematic flowchart of another interface display method according to this embodiment.
  • FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram of another graphical user interface displayed on the electronic device in this embodiment.
  • FIG. 24 is a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device according to this embodiment.
  • 25 is a schematic structural diagram of another electronic device according to this embodiment.
  • FIG. 26 is a schematic structural diagram of still another electronic device according to this embodiment.
  • first, second, etc. may be used in the following embodiments to describe the operations entered by the user on the touch screen, the operations entered by the user on the touch screen should not be limited to these terms. These terms are only used to distinguish the actions entered by the user on the touch screen from each other.
  • the first operation may also be referred to as the second operation, and similarly, the second operation may also be referred to as the first operation.
  • the terms first, second, etc. may be used to describe the graphical user interface (GUI) displayed on the touch screen, but the GUI displayed on the touch screen is not limited to these terms. These terms are used only To separate the GUIs displayed on the touch screen from each other.
  • GUI graphical user interface
  • This embodiment provides a method for displaying an interface, which can be implemented in an electronic device with a touch screen.
  • the user when the user holds the electronic device with one hand, the user currently divides the GUI currently displayed on the touch screen of the electronic device into a plurality of sub-interfaces, and projects the sub-interfaces that the user wants to operate in the multiple sub-interfaces to In the area reachable by the user's finger on the touch screen, that is, the target interface that is the same as the content of the sub-interface that the user wants to operate is superimposed on the currently displayed GUI, so that the user can realize the area that cannot be reached by the finger within the accessible area Actions within the content.
  • the user when the user holds the electronic device with one hand, the user currently divides the GUI currently displayed on the touch screen of the electronic device into multiple sub-interfaces, and the sub-interfaces that the user wants to operate among the multiple sub-interfaces include Controls are projected into the area accessible by the user ’s finger on the touch screen, that is, the controls included in the target interface with the same content of the sub-interface that the user wants to operate are superimposed on the currently displayed GUI, so that the user can The operation of the content in the area that can not be reached by a finger can be realized within. In this way, when the user holds the electronic device with one hand, the user can conveniently operate the content displayed on the area inaccessible by the finger in the touch screen without affecting the user's visual experience and operation experience. Efficient interaction between users.
  • control is a kind of GUI element, which is a software component contained in the application and controls all the data processed by the application and the interactive operation of these data.
  • the user can perform direct manipulation (direct manipulation) to Interact with controls to read or edit information about the application.
  • controls can include visual interface elements such as icons, buttons, menus, tabs, text boxes, dialog boxes, status bars, navigation bars, and widgets.
  • the electronic device may be a portable electronic device that further includes other functions such as a personal digital assistant and / or music player function, such as a mobile phone, a tablet, a wearable device with a wireless communication function (such as a smart watch), etc. .
  • portable electronic devices include, but are not limited to, carrying Or portable electronic devices with other operating systems.
  • the aforementioned portable electronic device may also be other portable electronic devices, such as a laptop computer having a touch-sensitive surface (for example, a touch panel). It should also be understood that, in some other embodiments, the aforementioned electronic device may not be a portable electronic device, but a desktop computer with a touch-sensitive surface (such as a touch panel).
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device 300.
  • the electronic device 300 may include a processor 310, an external memory interface 320, an internal memory 321, a universal serial bus (USB) interface 330, a charge management module 340, a power management module 341, a battery 342, an antenna 1, and an antenna 2 , Mobile communication module 350, wireless communication module 360, audio module 370, speaker 370A, receiver 370B, microphone 370C, headphone interface 370D, sensor module 380, button 390, motor 391, indicator 392, camera 393, display 394, and display 394, and Subscriber identification module (SIM) card interface 395 and the like.
  • SIM Subscriber identification module
  • the sensor module 380 may include a pressure sensor 380A, a gyroscope sensor 380B, an air pressure sensor 380C, a magnetic sensor 380D, an acceleration sensor 380E, a distance sensor 380F, a proximity light sensor 380G, a fingerprint sensor 380H, a temperature sensor 380J, a touch sensor 380K, and ambient light.
  • the structure illustrated in this embodiment does not constitute a specific limitation on the electronic device 300.
  • the electronic device 300 may include more or fewer components than shown, or combine certain components, or split certain components, or different component arrangements.
  • the illustrated components can be implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of software and hardware.
  • the processor 310 may include one or more processing units.
  • the processor 310 may include an application processor (AP), a modem processor, a graphics processing unit (GPU), and an image signal processor. (image, signal processor, ISP), controller, memory, video codec, digital signal processor (DSP), baseband processor, and / or neural-network processing unit (NPU) Wait.
  • AP application processor
  • modem processor graphics processing unit
  • GPU graphics processing unit
  • image signal processor image signal processor
  • ISP image signal processor
  • DSP digital signal processor
  • NPU neural-network processing unit
  • different processing units may be independent devices or integrated in one or more processors.
  • the controller may be a nerve center and a command center of the electronic device 300.
  • the controller can generate operation control signals according to the instruction operation code and timing signals, and complete the control of fetching and executing instructions.
  • the processor 310 may further include a memory for storing instructions and data.
  • the memory in the processor 310 is a cache memory.
  • the memory may store instructions or data that the processor 310 has just used or cyclically used. If the processor 310 needs to use the instruction or data again, it can be directly called from the memory. Repeated accesses are avoided and the waiting time of the processor 310 is reduced, thereby improving the efficiency of the system.
  • the processor 310 may include one or more interfaces.
  • the interface may include an integrated circuit (inter-integrated circuit, I2C) interface, an integrated circuit (inter-integrated circuit, sound, I2S) interface, a pulse code modulation (pulse code modulation, PCM) interface, a universal asynchronous transceiver (universal asynchronous) receiver / transmitter (UART) interface, mobile industry processor interface (MIPI), general-purpose input / output (GPIO) interface, subscriber identity module (SIM) interface, and / Or universal serial bus (universal serial bus, USB) interface.
  • I2C integrated circuit
  • I2S integrated circuit
  • PCM pulse code modulation
  • PCM pulse code modulation
  • UART universal asynchronous transceiver
  • MIPI mobile industry processor interface
  • GPIO general-purpose input / output
  • SIM subscriber identity module
  • USB universal serial bus
  • the I2C interface is a two-way synchronous serial bus, including a serial data line (SDA) and a serial clock line (SCL).
  • the processor 310 may include multiple sets of I2C buses.
  • the processor 310 may be respectively coupled to a touch sensor 380K, a charger, a flash, a camera 393, and the like through different I2C bus interfaces.
  • the processor 310 may be coupled to the touch sensor 380K through the I2C interface, so that the processor 310 and the touch sensor 380K communicate through the I2C bus interface to implement the touch function of the electronic device 300.
  • the I2S interface can be used for audio communication.
  • the processor 310 may include multiple sets of I2S buses.
  • the processor 310 may be coupled to the audio module 370 through an I2S bus to implement communication between the processor 310 and the audio module 370.
  • the audio module 370 may transmit an audio signal to the wireless communication module 360 through an I2S interface to implement a function of receiving a call through a Bluetooth headset.
  • the PCM interface can also be used for audio communications, sampling, quantizing, and encoding analog signals.
  • the audio module 370 and the wireless communication module 360 may be coupled through a PCM bus interface.
  • the audio module 370 may also transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 360 through the PCM interface, so as to implement the function of receiving calls through a Bluetooth headset. Both the I2S interface and the PCM interface can be used for audio communication.
  • the UART interface is a universal serial data bus for asynchronous communication.
  • the bus may be a two-way communication bus. It converts the data to be transferred between serial and parallel communications.
  • a UART interface is typically used to connect the processor 310 and the wireless communication module 360.
  • the processor 310 communicates with a Bluetooth module in the wireless communication module 360 through a UART interface to implement a Bluetooth function.
  • the audio module 370 may transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 360 through a UART interface, so as to implement a function of playing music through a Bluetooth headset.
  • the MIPI interface can be used to connect the processor 310 with peripheral devices such as the display 394 and the camera 393.
  • the MIPI interface includes a camera serial interface (CSI), a display serial interface (DSI), and the like.
  • the processor 310 and the camera 393 communicate through a CSI interface to implement a shooting function of the electronic device 300.
  • the processor 310 and the display screen 394 communicate through a DSI interface to implement a display function of the electronic device 300.
  • the GPIO interface can be configured by software.
  • the GPIO interface can be configured as a control signal or as a data signal.
  • the GPIO interface may be used to connect the processor 310 with the camera 393, the display 394, the wireless communication module 360, the audio module 370, the sensor module 380, and the like.
  • GPIO interface can also be configured as I2C interface, I2S interface, UART interface, MIPI interface, etc.
  • the USB interface 330 is an interface that complies with the USB standard specification, and specifically may be a Mini USB interface, a Micro USB interface, a USB Type C interface, and the like.
  • the USB interface 330 can be used to connect a charger to charge the electronic device 300, and can also be used to transfer data between the electronic device 300 and a peripheral device. It can also be used to connect headphones and play audio through headphones. This interface can also be used to connect other electronic devices, such as AR devices.
  • the interface connection relationship between the modules shown in this embodiment is only a schematic description, and does not constitute a limitation on the structure of the electronic device 300.
  • the electronic device 300 may also adopt different interface connection modes or a combination of multiple interface connection modes in the above embodiments.
  • the charging management module 340 is configured to receive a charging input from a charger.
  • the charger may be a wireless charger or a wired charger.
  • the charging management module 340 may receive the charging input of the wired charger through the USB interface 330.
  • the charging management module 340 may receive a wireless charging input through a wireless charging coil of the electronic device 300. While the charge management module 340 is charging the battery 342, the power management module 341 can also provide power to the electronic device.
  • the power management module 341 is used to connect the battery 342, the charge management module 340, and the processor 310.
  • the power management module 341 receives inputs from the battery 342 and / or the charge management module 340, and supplies power to the processor 310, the internal memory 321, the external memory, the display screen 394, the camera 393, and the wireless communication module 360.
  • the power management module 341 can also be used to monitor parameters such as battery capacity, battery cycle times, battery health status (leakage, impedance), and so on.
  • the power management module 341 may also be disposed in the processor 310.
  • the power management module 341 and the charge management module 340 may be provided in the same device.
  • the wireless communication function of the electronic device 300 may be implemented by the antenna 1, the antenna 2, the mobile communication module 350, the wireless communication module 360, a modem processor, and a baseband processor.
  • the antenna 1 and the antenna 2 are used for transmitting and receiving electromagnetic wave signals.
  • Each antenna in the electronic device 300 may be used to cover a single or multiple communication frequency bands. Different antennas can also be multiplexed to improve antenna utilization.
  • antenna 1 can be multiplexed into a diversity antenna for a wireless local area network.
  • the antenna may be used in conjunction with a tuning switch.
  • the mobile communication module 350 may provide a wireless communication solution including 2G / 3G / 4G / 5G and the like applied to the electronic device 300.
  • the mobile communication module 350 may include at least one filter, a switch, a power amplifier, a low noise amplifier (LNA), and the like.
  • the mobile communication module 350 may receive the electromagnetic wave by the antenna 1, and perform filtering, amplification, and other processing on the received electromagnetic wave, and transmit it to the modem processor for demodulation.
  • the mobile communication module 350 can also amplify the signal modulated by the modem processor and turn it into electromagnetic wave radiation through the antenna 1.
  • at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 350 may be provided in the processor 310.
  • at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 350 may be provided in the same device as at least part of the modules of the processor 310.
  • the modem processor may include a modulator and a demodulator.
  • the modulator is configured to modulate a low-frequency baseband signal to be transmitted into a high-frequency signal.
  • the demodulator is used to demodulate the received electromagnetic wave signal into a low-frequency baseband signal.
  • the demodulator then transmits the demodulated low-frequency baseband signal to the baseband processor for processing.
  • the low-frequency baseband signal is processed by the baseband processor and then passed to the application processor.
  • the application processor outputs a sound signal through an audio device (not limited to a speaker 370A, a receiver 370B, etc.), or displays an image or video through a display screen 394.
  • the modem processor may be a separate device.
  • the modem processor may be independent of the processor 310 and provided in the same device as the mobile communication module 350 or other functional modules.
  • the wireless communication module 360 can provide wireless local area networks (WLAN) (such as wireless fidelity (Wi-Fi) networks), Bluetooth (bluetooth, BT), and global navigation satellites applied to the electronic device 300. Wireless communication solutions such as global navigation system, GNSS, frequency modulation (FM), near field communication (NFC), and infrared technology (infrared, IR).
  • the wireless communication module 360 may be one or more devices that integrate at least one communication processing module.
  • the wireless communication module 360 receives electromagnetic waves via the antenna 2, frequency-modulates and filters the electromagnetic wave signals, and sends the processed signals to the processor 310.
  • the wireless communication module 360 may also receive a signal to be transmitted from the processor 310, frequency-modulate it, amplify it, and turn it into electromagnetic wave radiation through the antenna 2.
  • the antenna 1 of the electronic device 300 is coupled to the mobile communication module 350, and the antenna 2 is coupled to the wireless communication module 360, so that the electronic device 300 can communicate with the network and other devices through wireless communication technology.
  • the wireless communication technology may include a global mobile communication system (GSM), a general packet radio service (GPRS), a code division multiple access (CDMA), and broadband. Code division multiple access (wideband code division multiple access, WCDMA), time-division code division multiple access (TD-SCDMA), long term evolution (LTE), BT, GNSS, WLAN, NFC , FM, and / or IR technology.
  • the GNSS may include a global positioning system (GPS), a global navigation satellite system (GLONASS), a beidou navigation navigation system (BDS), and a quasi-zenith satellite system (quasi -zenith satellite system (QZSS) and / or satellite based augmentation systems (SBAS).
  • GPS global positioning system
  • GLONASS global navigation satellite system
  • BDS Bertdou navigation navigation system
  • QZSS quasi-zenith satellite system
  • SBAS satellite based augmentation systems
  • the electronic device 300 implements a display function through a GPU, a display screen 394, and an application processor.
  • the GPU is a microprocessor for image processing and connects the display 394 and the application processor.
  • the GPU is used to perform mathematical and geometric calculations for graphics rendering.
  • the processor 310 may include one or more GPUs that execute program instructions to generate or change display information.
  • the display 394 is used to display images, videos, and the like.
  • the display screen 394 includes a display panel.
  • the display panel can use a liquid crystal display (LCD), an organic light-emitting diode (OLED), an active matrix organic light emitting diode or an active matrix organic light emitting diode (active-matrix organic light-emitting diode).
  • LCD liquid crystal display
  • OLED organic light-emitting diode
  • active matrix organic light emitting diode active-matrix organic light-emitting diode
  • active-matrix organic light-emitting diode active-matrix organic light-emitting diode
  • emitting diodes AMOLED
  • flexible light-emitting diodes FLEDs
  • Miniled MicroLed, Micro-oLed, quantum dot light emitting diodes (QLEDs), etc.
  • the electronic device 300 may include one or N display screens 394, where N is a positive integer greater than one.
  • the electronic device 300 can implement a shooting function through an ISP, a camera 393, a video codec, a GPU, a display 394, and an application processor.
  • the ISP processes the data fed back from the camera 393. For example, when taking a picture, the shutter is opened, and the light is transmitted to the light receiving element of the camera through the lens. The light signal is converted into an electrical signal, and the light receiving element of the camera passes the electrical signal to the ISP for processing and converts the image to the naked eye. ISP can also optimize the image's noise, brightness, and skin tone. ISP can also optimize the exposure, color temperature and other parameters of the shooting scene. In some embodiments, an ISP may be provided in the camera 393.
  • the camera 393 is used to capture still images or videos.
  • An object generates an optical image through a lens and projects it onto a photosensitive element.
  • the photosensitive element may be a charge coupled device (CCD) or a complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor (CMOS) phototransistor.
  • CMOS complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor
  • the photosensitive element converts the optical signal into an electrical signal, and then passes the electrical signal to the ISP to convert it into a digital image signal.
  • the ISP outputs digital image signals to the DSP for processing.
  • DSP converts digital image signals into image signals in standard RGB, YUV and other formats.
  • the electronic device 300 may include one or N cameras 393, where N is a positive integer greater than 1.
  • a digital signal processor is used to process digital signals. In addition to digital image signals, it can also process other digital signals. For example, when the electronic device 300 selects a frequency point, the digital signal processor is used to perform a Fourier transform on the frequency point energy and the like.
  • Video codecs are used to compress or decompress digital video.
  • the electronic device 300 may support one or more video codecs. In this way, the electronic device 300 can play or record videos in multiple encoding formats, such as: moving picture expert groups (MPEG) 1, MPEG2, MPEG3, MPEG4, and so on.
  • MPEG moving picture expert groups
  • the NPU is a neural-network (NN) computing processor.
  • NN neural-network
  • applications such as intelligent cognition of the electronic device 300 can be implemented, such as: image recognition, face recognition, speech recognition, text understanding, and the like.
  • the external memory interface 320 can be used to connect an external memory card, such as a Micro SD card, to achieve the expansion of the storage capacity of the electronic device 300.
  • the external memory card communicates with the processor 310 through the external memory interface 320 to implement a data storage function. For example, save music, videos and other files on an external memory card.
  • the internal memory 321 may be used to store computer executable program code, where the executable program code includes instructions.
  • the processor 310 executes various functional applications and data processing of the electronic device 300 by executing instructions stored in the internal memory 321.
  • the internal memory 321 may include a storage program area and a storage data area.
  • the storage program area may store an operating system, at least one application required by a function (such as a sound playback function, an image playback function, etc.) and the like.
  • the storage data area can store data (such as audio data, phone book, etc.) created during the use of the electronic device 300.
  • the internal memory 321 may include a high-speed random access memory, and may also include a non-volatile memory, for example, at least one magnetic disk storage device, a flash memory device, a universal flash memory (UFS), and the like.
  • UFS universal flash memory
  • the electronic device 300 can implement audio functions through an audio module 370, a speaker 370A, a receiver 370B, a microphone 370C, a headphone interface 370D, and an application processor. Such as music playback, recording, etc.
  • the audio module 370 is used to convert digital audio information into an analog audio signal and output, and is also used to convert an analog audio input into a digital audio signal.
  • the audio module 370 may also be used to encode and decode audio signals.
  • the audio module 370 may be disposed in the processor 310, or some functional modules of the audio module 370 may be disposed in the processor 310.
  • the speaker 370A also called a "horn" is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals.
  • the electronic device 300 can listen to music through the speaker 370A, or listen to a hands-free call.
  • the receiver 370B also known as the "earpiece" is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals.
  • the electronic device 300 answers a call or a voice message, it can answer the voice by holding the receiver 370B close to the human ear.
  • Microphone 370C also called “microphone”, “microphone”, is used to convert sound signals into electrical signals.
  • the user can make a sound through a person's mouth near the microphone 370C, and input a sound signal into the microphone 370C.
  • the electronic device 300 may be provided with at least one microphone 370C.
  • the electronic device 300 may be provided with two microphones 370C, in addition to collecting sound signals, it may also implement a noise reduction function.
  • the electronic device 300 may further be provided with three, four, or more microphones 370C to realize the collection of sound signals, reduce noise, and also identify the source of the sound, and implement the directional recording function.
  • the headset interface 370D is used to connect a wired headset.
  • the earphone interface 370D may be a USB interface 330, or a 3.5mm open mobile electronic device platform (OMTP) standard interface, a cellular telecommunications industry association (United States of America, CTIA) standard interface.
  • OMTP open mobile electronic device platform
  • CTIA cellular telecommunications industry association
  • the pressure sensor 380A is used to sense the pressure signal, and can convert the pressure signal into an electrical signal.
  • the pressure sensor 380A may be provided on the display 394.
  • the capacitive pressure sensor may be at least two parallel plates having a conductive material. When a force is applied to the pressure sensor 380A, the capacitance between the electrodes changes.
  • the electronic device 300 determines the intensity of the pressure according to the change in capacitance. When a touch operation is performed on the display screen 394, the electronic device 300 detects the intensity of the touch operation according to the pressure sensor 380A.
  • the electronic device 300 may also calculate the touched position based on the detection signal of the pressure sensor 380A.
  • touch operations acting on the same touch position but different touch operation intensities may correspond to different operation instructions. For example, when a touch operation with a touch operation intensity lower than the first pressure threshold is applied to the short message application icon, an instruction for viewing the short message is executed. When a touch operation with a touch operation intensity greater than or equal to the first pressure threshold is applied to the short message application icon, an instruction for creating a short message is executed.
  • the gyro sensor 380B may be used to determine a motion posture of the electronic device 300.
  • the angular velocity of the electronic device 300 about three axes ie, the x, y, and z axes
  • the gyro sensor 380B can be used for image stabilization.
  • the gyro sensor 380B detects the angle of the electronic device 300 shake, and calculates the distance that the lens module needs to compensate according to the angle, so that the lens can cancel the shake of the electronic device 300 through the backward movement to achieve image stabilization.
  • the gyro sensor 380B can also be used for navigation and somatosensory gaming scenes.
  • the barometric pressure sensor 380C is used to measure air pressure.
  • the electronic device 300 calculates the altitude through the air pressure value measured by the air pressure sensor 380C, and assists in positioning and navigation.
  • the magnetic sensor 380D includes a Hall sensor.
  • the electronic device 300 may use the magnetic sensor 380D to detect the opening and closing of the flip leather case.
  • the electronic device 300 may detect the opening and closing of the flip according to the magnetic sensor 380D. Further, according to the opened and closed state of the holster or the opened and closed state of the flip cover, characteristics such as automatic unlocking of the flip cover are set.
  • the acceleration sensor 380E can detect the magnitude of the acceleration of the electronic device 300 in various directions (generally three axes).
  • the magnitude and direction of gravity can be detected when the electronic device 300 is stationary. It can also be used to recognize the posture of electronic devices, and is used in applications such as switching between horizontal and vertical screens, and pedometers.
  • the electronic device 300 can measure the distance by infrared or laser. In some embodiments, when shooting a scene, the electronic device 300 may use a distance sensor 380F to measure a distance to achieve fast focusing.
  • the proximity light sensor 380G may include, for example, a light emitting diode (LED) and a light detector, such as a photodiode.
  • the light emitting diode may be an infrared light emitting diode.
  • the electronic device 300 emits infrared light through a light emitting diode.
  • the electronic device 300 uses a photodiode to detect infrared reflected light from a nearby object. When sufficient reflected light is detected, it can be determined that there is an object near the electronic device 300. When insufficiently reflected light is detected, the electronic device 300 may determine that there is no object near the electronic device 300.
  • the electronic device 300 can use the proximity light sensor 380G to detect that the user is holding the electronic device 300 close to the ear to talk, so as to automatically turn off the screen to save power.
  • the proximity light sensor 380G can also be used in holster mode, and the pocket mode automatically unlocks and locks the screen.
  • Ambient light sensor 380L is used to sense ambient light brightness.
  • the electronic device 300 can adaptively adjust the brightness of the display screen 394 according to the perceived ambient light brightness.
  • Ambient light sensor 380L can also be used to automatically adjust white balance when taking pictures.
  • the ambient light sensor 380L can also cooperate with the proximity light sensor 380G to detect whether the electronic device 300 is in a pocket to prevent accidental touch.
  • the fingerprint sensor 380H is used to collect fingerprints.
  • the electronic device 300 may use the collected fingerprint characteristics to realize fingerprint unlocking, access application lock, fingerprint photographing, fingerprint answering incoming calls, and the like.
  • the temperature sensor 380J is used to detect the temperature.
  • the electronic device 300 executes a temperature processing strategy using the temperature detected by the temperature sensor 380J. For example, when the temperature reported by the temperature sensor 380J exceeds the threshold, the electronic device 300 performs a performance reduction of a processor located near the temperature sensor 380J, so as to reduce power consumption and implement thermal protection.
  • the electronic device 300 when the temperature is lower than another threshold, the electronic device 300 heats the battery 342 to avoid the abnormal shutdown of the electronic device 300 caused by the low temperature.
  • the electronic device 300 when the temperature is lower than another threshold, performs a boost on the output voltage of the battery 342 to avoid abnormal shutdown caused by low temperature.
  • the touch sensor 380K is also called “touch panel”.
  • the touch sensor 380K may be provided on the display screen 394.
  • the touch sensor is composed of the touch sensor 380K and the display screen 394, which is also called a "touch screen”.
  • the touch sensor 380K is used to detect a touch operation acting on or near it.
  • the touch sensor can pass the detected touch operation to the application processor to determine the type of touch event.
  • a visual output related to the touch operation may be provided through the display screen 394.
  • the touch sensor 380K may also be disposed on the surface of the electronic device 300, which is different from the position where the display screen 394 is located.
  • the bone conduction sensor 380M can acquire vibration signals.
  • the bone conduction sensor 380M may acquire a vibration signal of a human voice oscillating bone mass.
  • Bone conduction sensor 380M can also contact the human pulse and receive blood pressure beating signals.
  • the bone conduction sensor 380M may also be provided in the earphone and combined into a bone conduction earphone.
  • the audio module 370 can analyze a voice signal based on the vibration signal of the oscillating bone mass obtained by the bone conduction sensor 380M to implement a voice function.
  • the application processor may analyze the heart rate information based on the blood pressure beating signal acquired by the bone conduction sensor 380M to implement a heart rate detection function.
  • the keys 390 include a start key, a volume key, and the like.
  • the key 390 may be a mechanical key. It can also be a touch button.
  • the electronic device 300 can receive key input, and generate a key signal input related to user settings and function control of the electronic device 300.
  • the motor 391 may generate a vibration alert.
  • the motor 391 can be used for incoming vibration alert and touch vibration feedback.
  • the touch operation applied to different applications can correspond to different vibration feedback effects.
  • the motor 391 can also respond to different vibration feedback effects.
  • Different application scenarios (such as time reminders, receiving information, alarm clocks, games, etc.) can also correspond to different vibration feedback effects.
  • Touch vibration feedback effect can also support customization.
  • the indicator 392 can be an indicator light, which can be used to indicate the charging status, power change, and can also be used to indicate messages, missed calls, notifications, etc.
  • the SIM card interface 395 is used to connect a SIM card.
  • the SIM card can be contacted and separated from the electronic device 300 by inserting or removing the SIM card interface 395.
  • the electronic device 300 may support one or N SIM card interfaces, and N is a positive integer greater than 1.
  • SIM card interface 395 can support Nano SIM card, Micro SIM card, SIM card, etc. Multiple SIM cards can be inserted into the same SIM card interface 395 at the same time. The types of the multiple cards may be the same or different.
  • the SIM card interface 395 can also be compatible with different types of SIM cards.
  • the SIM card interface 395 is also compatible with external memory cards.
  • the electronic device 300 interacts with the network through a SIM card to implement functions such as calling and data communication.
  • the electronic device 300 uses an eSIM, that is, an embedded SIM card.
  • the eSIM card can be embedded in the electronic device 300 and cannot be separated from the electronic device 300.
  • the software system of the electronic device 300 may adopt a layered architecture, event-driven architecture, micro-core architecture, micro-service architecture, or cloud architecture.
  • This embodiment takes a layered Android system as an example to exemplify the software structure of the electronic device 300.
  • FIG. 4 is a software configuration block diagram of the electronic device 300 in this embodiment.
  • the layered architecture divides the software into several layers, each of which has a clear role and division of labor.
  • the layers communicate with each other through a software interface.
  • the Android system is divided into four layers, which are an application layer, an application framework layer, an Android runtime and a system library, and a kernel layer from top to bottom.
  • the application layer can include a series of application packages.
  • the application package can include applications such as camera, gallery, calendar, call, map, navigation, WLAN, Bluetooth, music, video, and SMS.
  • the application framework layer provides an application programming interface (API) and a programming framework for applications at the application layer.
  • API application programming interface
  • the application framework layer includes some predefined functions.
  • the application framework layer may include a window manager, a content provider, a view system, a phone manager, a resource manager, a notification manager, and the like.
  • the window manager is used to manage window programs.
  • the window manager can obtain the display size, determine whether there is a status bar, lock the screen, take a screenshot, etc.
  • Content providers are used to store and retrieve data and make it accessible to applications.
  • the data may include videos, images, audio, calls made and received, browsing history and bookmarks, phone books, and so on.
  • the view system includes visual controls, such as controls that display text, controls that display pictures, and so on.
  • the view system can be used to build applications.
  • the display interface can consist of one or more views.
  • the display interface including the SMS notification icon may include a view that displays text and a view that displays pictures.
  • the phone manager is used to provide a communication function of the electronic device 300. For example, management of call status (including connection, hang up, etc.).
  • the resource manager provides various resources for the application, such as localized strings, icons, pictures, layout files, video files, and so on.
  • the notification manager enables the application to display notification information in the status bar, which can be used to convey notification-type messages that can disappear automatically after a short stay without user interaction.
  • the notification manager is used to inform download completion, message reminders, etc.
  • the notification manager can also be a notification that appears in the status bar at the top of the system in the form of a chart or scroll bar text, such as a notification of an application running in the background, or a notification that appears on the screen in the form of a dialog window.
  • text messages are displayed in the status bar, sounds are emitted, electronic equipment vibrates, and the indicator light flashes.
  • Android Runtime includes core libraries and virtual machines. Android runtime is responsible for the scheduling and management of the Android system.
  • the core library contains two parts: one is the functional functions that the Java language needs to call, and the other is the Android core library.
  • the application layer and the application framework layer run in a virtual machine.
  • the virtual machine executes the java files of the application layer and the application framework layer as binary files.
  • Virtual machines are used to perform object lifecycle management, stack management, thread management, security and exception management, and garbage collection.
  • the system library can include multiple functional modules. For example: surface manager (media manager), media library (Media library), three-dimensional graphics processing library (for example: OpenGL ES), 2D graphics engine (for example: SGL) and so on.
  • surface manager media manager
  • media library Media library
  • Three-dimensional graphics processing library for example: OpenGL ES
  • 2D graphics engine for example: SGL
  • the Surface Manager is used to manage the display subsystem and provides a fusion of 2D and 3D graphics layers for multiple applications.
  • the media library supports a variety of commonly used audio and video formats for playback and recording, as well as still image files.
  • the media library can support multiple audio and video encoding formats, such as: MPEG4, H.264, MP3, AAC, AMR, JPG, PNG, etc.
  • the 3D graphics processing library is used to implement 3D graphics drawing, image rendering, compositing, and layer processing.
  • the 2D graphics engine is a graphics engine for 2D graphics.
  • the kernel layer is the layer between hardware and software.
  • the kernel layer contains at least a display driver, a camera driver, an audio driver, and a sensor driver.
  • the electronic device may start the one-handed operation mode when it is determined that a specific condition is satisfied.
  • the electronic device may divide the first GUI of the first application displayed on the touch screen into N sub-interfaces, and project controls included in one of the N sub-interfaces onto the touch screen.
  • the controls included in the first target interface are displayed in the projection area, and the controls included in the first target interface are superimposed and displayed on the first GUI.
  • the above-mentioned superimposed display may refer to the first target interface floatingly displayed on the first GUI. In some other embodiments, the above-mentioned superimposed display may mean that the first target interface is displayed on the first GUI, and the first GUI performs Gaussian blur processing.
  • the electronic device may display a one-handed operation interface when it is determined that a specific condition is satisfied.
  • the one-handed operation interface may be an interface displayed in the one-handed operation mode described above.
  • the projection area may be an entire area or a part of an area accessible by a finger when the user holds the electronic device with one hand. In this way, when the user holds the electronic device with one hand, it is more convenient to implement the operation on the content displayed on the area inaccessible to the finger in the touch screen.
  • the one-handed operation mode when the electronic device determines that a specific condition is met, the one-handed operation mode is activated. Specifically, the electronic device may start the one-handed operation mode when it is determined that the user holds the electronic device with one hand.
  • the electronic device may detect a holding gesture of the user holding the electronic device (the holding gesture may include one-handed holding and two-handed holding), and when it is determined that the holding gesture is one-handed holding, start one-handed Operating mode.
  • a sensor such as a proximity light sensor
  • the above sensor can detect that the holding gesture of the user holding the electronic device is one-handed.
  • the electronic device may initiate a one-handed operation mode.
  • the one-handed operation mode when the electronic device determines that a specific condition is met, the one-handed operation mode is activated, which may specifically include: when the electronic device determines that the operation input by the user on the touch screen is the first operation, the one-handed operation mode is activated.
  • the first operation may be a specific operation input by the user on the touch screen of the electronic device.
  • the specific operation may be a sliding operation with a specific sliding track (eg, shown as 502 in FIG. 5A).
  • the first operation may also be a user ’s operation of a virtual button displayed on the touch screen of the electronic device.
  • the first operation may be a user ’s double-click, heavy pressing, or long-press operation on the floating button displayed on the touch screen of the electronic device .
  • the electronic device may determine whether the operation input by the user is the first operation.
  • the electronic device determines that the operation input by the user is the first operation, the electronic device starts a one-handed operation mode.
  • a first operation is a sliding operation with a specific sliding track input by a user on a touch screen of an electronic device
  • the first GUI includes a sub-screen 501 included in the main screen as an example for detailed description.
  • the user holds the electronic device with one hand (such as the left hand), the user can use a left-hand thumb to input a sliding operation with a sliding track shown by 502 on the electronic device touch screen.
  • the electronic device When the electronic device receives the sliding operation, it may determine that the sliding operation is the first operation. In response to the above determination, the electronic device may initiate a one-handed operation mode.
  • the first operation is a sliding operation with a specific sliding track
  • the specific sliding track includes but is not limited to the sliding track 502 shown in FIG. 5A.
  • the specific sliding track may also be a pointing electronic device. Sliding trajectory in the bottom right corner, etc. When the user uses the right hand to hold the electronic device, the sliding operation with a sliding track pointing to the lower right corner of the electronic device can be performed.
  • the electronic device may be configured with a switch button for turning on or off the one-handed operation function.
  • the switch button When the switch button is turned on, the electronic device can start the one-handed operation mode only when it is determined that certain conditions are met.
  • the switch button may be a virtual switch button displayed on a touch screen of the electronic device.
  • the user may perform a click operation on the switch button 602 of the one-hand operation function in the setting interface 601 of the electronic device.
  • the electronic device can turn on the one-handed operation function.
  • the electronic device can turn off the one-handed operation function.
  • the display effect of the switch button 602 shown in FIG. 6 is used to indicate that the one-hand operation function is not turned on. The user can perform a click operation on the switch button 602 at this time to turn on the one-hand operation function of the electronic device.
  • the switch button may be a physical button.
  • the physical button may be disposed on a surface of the electronic device (for example, a side of a mobile phone). After the user presses or dials the physical button, the electronic device can turn on the one-handed operation function. When the user's finger presses or toggles the physical button again, the electronic device can turn off the one-handed operation function.
  • the electronic device can start the one-hand operation mode when it is determined that a certain condition is satisfied. If the one-hand operation function of the electronic device is not turned on, when the electronic device receives a user operation on the touch screen of the electronic device, in response to the operation, it performs a conventional response, such as when the electronic device receives a pointing operation performed by the user on the touch screen. In the sliding operation in the lower left corner of the electronic device, a notification bar is displayed in response to the sliding operation.
  • the electronic device may divide the first GUI into N sub-interfaces, and project one of the N sub-interfaces into a projection area of the touch screen, that is, the electronic device is in The projection area displays a first target interface, the first target interface is superimposed and displayed on the first GUI, and the content of the first target interface and the content of one of the N sub-interfaces (such as the first sub-interface). the same.
  • the first GUI when the electronic device determines that certain conditions are met, the first GUI may be divided into N sub-interfaces, and controls in one of the N sub-interfaces are projected into a projection area of the touch screen, that is, The electronic device displays controls included in the first target interface in the projection area, and the controls included in the first target interface are superimposed and displayed on the first GUI. In this way, it is convenient for the user to perform one-handed operation.
  • the N sub-interfaces may be the same size and the same shape, or the N sub-interfaces may be different sizes or different shapes. The following embodiments do not place any restrictions on this.
  • the first GUI may be divided to obtain multiple sub-controllers. Interface, thereby projecting one of the multiple sub-interfaces onto the projection area.
  • a first predetermined threshold such as an application interface such as Taobao
  • the first GUI may be divided to obtain multiple sub-interfaces, so that the controls included in one of the multiple sub-interfaces are projected to the projection area.
  • the first GUI may be omitted.
  • a GUI is divided, and the controls included in the first GUI can be projected to the projection area, such as projecting virtual keys such as play, pause, and fast forward included in the playback interface of the video application.
  • the first GUI may be a sub-screen included on a home screen (home screen, which may also be referred to as a desktop) displayed on a touch screen of an electronic device, or may be any display interface of any application in the electronic device.
  • the division of the first GUI may not include a status bar and a navigation bar. If the first GUI is a sub-screen included in the main screen, if the sub-screen includes a dock bar, the division of the first GUI may not include the dock bar.
  • the electronic device may divide the first GUI into N sub-interfaces according to the value of N.
  • the value of N may be pre-configured in the electronic device, or may be manually set by a user, or may be automatically configured by the electronic device according to content included in the first GUI.
  • the value of N may increase as the size of the touch screen of the electronic device increases.
  • the value of N may be 4.
  • the value of N can be 6.
  • the value of N can be 9.
  • FIGS. 7A-7C it is a schematic diagram of the division results of the first GUI displayed on touch screens of different sizes.
  • the first GUI displayed on the 5-inch touch screen is divided into four sub-interfaces, which are sub-interface 1 (G1), sub-interface 2 (G2), sub-interface 3 (G3), and sub-interface 4 ( G4).
  • the first GUI displayed on the 6-inch touch screen is divided into six sub-interfaces, which are sub-interface 1 (G1), sub-interface 2 (G2), sub-interface 3 (G3), and sub-interface 4. (G4), sub-interface 5 (G5), and sub-interface 6 (G6).
  • the first GUI displayed on the 7-inch touch screen is divided into nine sub-interfaces, which are sub-interface 1 (G1), sub-interface 2 (G2), sub-interface 3 (G3), and sub-interface 4. (G4), sub-interface 5 (G5), sub-interface 6 (G6), sub-interface 7 (G7), sub-interface 8 (G8), and sub-interface 9 (G9).
  • the user can set the value of N in a setting option 603 included in the setting interface 601 of the electronic device.
  • the value of N may be dynamically changed as the content included in the GUI displayed on the touch screen changes. For example, the more controls included on the GUI displayed on the touch screen, the larger the value of N is. For example, as shown in FIG.
  • the electronic device configures the value of N as 6, that is, the sub-screen 701 is divided into 6 sub-interfaces, respectively Sub-interface 1 (G1), sub-interface 2 (G2), sub-interface 3 (G3), sub-interface 4 (G4), sub-interface 5 (G5), and sub-interface 6 (G6). As shown in FIG.
  • the Taobao's interface 702 contains more controls than the subscreen 701 contains, and the electronic device configures the value of N as 9, which is about to be Taobao Interface 702 is divided into 9 sub-interfaces, which are sub-interface 1 (G1), sub-interface 2 (G2), sub-interface 3 (G3), sub-interface 4 (G4), sub-interface 5 (G5), and sub-interface 6 ( G6), sub-interface 7 (G7), sub-interface 8 (G8), and sub-interface 9 (G9).
  • the electronic device may divide the first GUI into N sub-interfaces according to the value of N, such as dividing the first GUI into N sub-interfaces according to the value of N.
  • N the value of N
  • the electronic device may also divide the first GUI into N sub-interfaces according to the content included in the first GUI (such as the layout of controls in the first GUI).
  • the values and sizes of the sub-interfaces obtained by different first GUI divisions may be the same or different.
  • the electronic device may divide the first GUI into N sub-interfaces according to the content included in the first GUI.
  • the first GUI is a WeChat interface
  • the WeChat interface 801 may be changed according to the layout of the controls on the WeChat interface 801 currently displayed on the touch screen of the electronic device. It is divided into 6 sub-interfaces as shown in FIG. 8A.
  • the interface of Taobao 802 can be divided into The nine sub-interfaces shown in FIG. 8B.
  • the shape (such as a square) of the sub-interface obtained by the division shown in FIG. 5B, FIG. 7A to FIG. 7E, and FIG. 8A to FIG. 8B is only one possible example.
  • the sub-interface obtained by the division is also It can be a regular shape such as a circle, a pentagon, a hexagon, or an irregular shape.
  • the outlines of the above sub-interfaces can be superimposed and displayed on the first GUI (as shown in any of the above-mentioned Figures 5B, 7A-7E, and 8A-8B), which is convenient for users Perform the one-handed operation more intuitively; in other embodiments, the outline of the sub-interface may not be displayed on the first GUI.
  • the electronic device may project one of the N sub-interfaces (such as the first sub-interface) onto a projection area of the touch screen, that is, the electronic device.
  • a first target interface is displayed in the projection area.
  • the first target interface is superimposed and displayed on the first GUI, and its content is the same as that of one of the N sub-interfaces.
  • the electronic device may project the controls included in one of the N sub-interfaces onto the projection area of the touch screen.
  • the projection area displays controls included in the first target interface, and the controls included in the first target interface are superimposed and displayed on the first GUI.
  • the display effect of the sub-interface (such as the first sub-interface) projected onto the projection area may be different from the display effect of other sub-interfaces in the first GUI; for example, the transparency of the first sub-interface is less than that of other sub-interfaces in the first GUI.
  • the transparency of the sub-interface for example, the background color of the first sub-interface is gray, and the background colors of the other sub-interfaces in the first GUI are white (for example, FIGS. 11A-11B may be an example, in which the figures use diagonal lines)
  • the fill represents the background color of the sub-interface is gray).
  • the display effect of the first target interface is the same as the display effect of the sub-interface (such as the first sub-interface) projected onto the projection area, and the display effect is the same as that of other sub-interfaces in the first GUI.
  • the effect is different; for example, the transparency of the first target interface is the same as the transparency of the first sub-interface, and the transparency of other sub-interfaces in the first GUI is greater than the transparency of the first target interface.
  • the background colors of the sub-interfaces are all gray, and the background colors of the other sub-interfaces in the first GUI are white (for example, FIGS. 10A-10B can be an example, in which the background color of the sub-interface is represented by diagonal fill in the figure is gray). In this way, when the user operates in the projection area, it can be very intuitive to know which sub-interface in the first GUI corresponds to the first target interface in the projection area.
  • the projection area is an entire area or a part of the area that can be touched by a finger when the user holds the electronic device with one hand.
  • the projection area may coincide with a region where one of the N sub-interfaces is located.
  • the one-handed holding may include a left-handed holding and a right-handed holding.
  • the electronic device can determine a projection area.
  • the electronic device may determine the projection area according to a holding gesture of the user holding the electronic device. Generally speaking, as shown in FIG.
  • the projection area may be the lower left corner area 901 of the touch screen of the electronic device.
  • the projection area may be the lower right corner area 902 of the touch screen of the electronic device.
  • the projection area when the user holds the electronic device with his left hand, the projection area may be the lower left corner area 903 of the touch screen of the electronic device. Similarly, as shown in FIG. 9D, when the user holds the electronic device with his right hand, the projection area may be the lower right corner area 904 of the touch screen of the electronic device.
  • the electronic device may use a configured sensor to detect whether a holding gesture of the user holding the electronic device is left-handed or right-handed.
  • the electronic device may also determine whether the holding gesture of the user holding the electronic device is left-handed or right-handed according to the position of the first operation on the touch screen. That is, the electronic device may determine the projection area according to the first operation. For example, when the position of the first operation on the touch screen is close to the left side of the touch screen of the electronic device, it is determined that the holding gesture of the user holding the electronic device is left hand holding, and at this time, the electronic device may determine that the projection area is the lower left of the touch screen of the electronic device Corner area.
  • the electronic device may determine that the projection area is the lower left corner of the touch screen of the electronic device .
  • the first sub-interface of the N sub-interfaces may be projected into the projection area by default, that is, the first display of the electronic device in the projection area is the first
  • the content of the target interface may be the same as the content of the first sub-interface by default.
  • the first sub-interface may be a sub-interface having one or more of the following conditions among the N sub-interfaces: in a region with the highest operating frequency, including the most controls, and having the most adjacent sub-interfaces.
  • the controls included in one of the N sub-interfaces may be projected onto the projection area by default.
  • the controls displayed by the electronic device in the projection area may be the same as the controls included in the first sub-interface by default.
  • the user may perform a second operation, such as a sliding operation, in the projection area.
  • the electronic device may project other sub-interfaces (such as a third sub-interface) of the N sub-interfaces into the above-mentioned projection area, that is, the electronic device displays a third target interface in the projection area.
  • the third target interface is hovering and displayed on the first GUI, and the content of the third target interface is the same as that of the third sub-interface.
  • the electronic device in response to the second operation, may include a control included in the third target interface displayed in the projection area. If the third sub-interface is not the sub-interface that the user wants to operate, the user may perform the second operation in the projection area until the sub-interface that the user wants to operate is projected into the projection area.
  • a user holds an electronic device with his left hand as an example.
  • the electronic device divides the first GUI of the first application currently displayed on the touch screen into nine sub-interfaces, which are sub-interface 1 (G1), sub-interface 2 (G2), and sub-interface 3 (G3).
  • Sub-interface 4 (G4) sub-interface 5 (G5), sub-interface 6 (G6), sub-interface 7 (G7), sub-interface 8 (G8), and sub-interface 9 (G9).
  • the electronic device may project the sub-interface 1 (G1) into the projection area 1001 of the touch screen by default. If the sub-interface that the user wants to operate is not sub-interface 1 (G1), but other sub-interfaces such as sub-interface 5 (G5), the user can perform a sliding operation in the above projection area, as shown in FIG. 10B, in response to With this sliding operation, the electronic device projects the sub-interface 5 (G5) into the projection area. The electronic device can project different sub-interfaces among the 9 sub-interfaces into the projection area according to the different directions of the sliding operation. As shown in FIG. 10A, if the sub-interface that the user wants to operate is sub-interface 5 (G5), the user can perform a sliding operation in the projection area with a downward direction (such as 1002 shown in FIG. 10A).
  • the content projected into the projection area is used as a sub-interface, that is, the target interface is displayed in the projection area as an example for detailed description.
  • the electronic device divides one sub-screen 1101 of the main screen currently displayed on the touch screen into six sub-interfaces, including sub-interface 1 (G1) and sub-interface 2 (G2).
  • the sub-interface 1 (G1) is the first sub-interface described above
  • the sub-interface 2 (G2) is the sub-interface that the user wants to operate as an example.
  • the electronic device may default to the sub-interface 1 (G1) Projected into the projection area 1102 of the touch screen, that is, the content of the target interface displayed by the electronic device in the projection area is the same as the content of the sub-interface 1 (G1).
  • the sub-interface that the user wants to operate is not sub-interface 1 (G1), but sub-interface 2 (G2)
  • the user can perform a sliding operation in the projection area with a direction upward (such as 1103 shown in FIG. 11A).
  • the electronic device projects the sub-interface 2 (G2) into the projection area 1102 of the touch screen, that is, the content of the target interface and the sub-interface 2 ( G2) is the same.
  • the content included in the projection area is used as the control included in the sub-interface, that is, the control included in the target interface is displayed in the projection area as an example for detailed description.
  • the electronic device divides the interface 1201 of Taobao currently displayed on the touch screen into 9 sub-interfaces, including sub-interface 1 (G1) and sub-interface 2 (G2).
  • sub-interface 1 (G1) is the first sub-interface described above
  • sub-interface 2 (G2) is the sub-interface that the user wants to operate as an example.
  • the electronic device can default the sub-interface
  • the controls 1202 and 1203 included in 1 (G1) are projected into the projection area 1205 of the touch screen, that is, the controls displayed in the projection area are the same as those included in the sub-interface 1 (G1).
  • the sub-interface that the user wants to operate is not sub-interface 1 (G1), but sub-interface 2 (G2), the user can perform a sliding operation with the direction to the left (such as 1206 shown in FIG. 12A) in the projection area. As shown in FIG.
  • the electronic device projects the control 1204 included in the sub-interface 2 (G2) into the projection area 1205 of the touch screen, that is, the control displayed by the electronic device in the projection area and the sub-interface 2 at this time.
  • the controls included are the same.
  • the size of the sub-interface that is actually projected onto the projection area may be larger than the size of the sub-interface that is actually divided, that is, the size of the target interface displayed in the projection area may be larger than the size of the corresponding sub-interface.
  • the shape of the sub-interface is square, the length of the sub-interface that is actually projected onto the projection area is greater than the length of the sub-interface that is actually divided, and / or the width of the sub-interface that is actually projected onto the projection area is greater than that obtained from the actual division The width of the child interface.
  • the radius of the sub-interface that is actually projected onto the projection area is larger than the radius of the sub-interface that is actually divided. In this way, it is possible to avoid that the control of the edge area of the obtained sub-interface is difficult to touch.
  • the length and width of the sub-interface obtained by actual division are L
  • the length and width of the sub-interface can be reserved for R, and then the length is (L + R).
  • the sub-interface with a width of (W + R) is projected onto the projection area, that is, the size of the target interface displayed in the projection area is: the length is (L + R) and the width is (W + R).
  • FIG. 9A to FIG. 9D, FIG. 10A to FIG. 10B, FIG. 11A to FIG. 11B, FIG. 12A to FIG. 12B, and FIG. 13 only give possible examples of the projection area in this embodiment by way of example.
  • the shape and size include, but are not limited to, the projection area shown in the figure above.
  • the electronic device may determine the shape and size of the projection area according to the size and shape of the sub-interface (such as the first sub-interface) that is projected onto the projection area and the projection ratio.
  • the projection ratio may refer to the ratio of the size of the first sub-interface to the size of the target interface, such as 1: 1, 1: 2, 1: 0.9, and so on.
  • the projection ratio may be pre-configured in the electronic device or manually set by the user (for example, the corresponding setting option may be included in the setting interface 601 shown in FIG. 6).
  • the electronic device can also determine the shape and size of the projection area according to a preset projection ratio (such as 1: 1), and the user can also adjust the size of the projection area (such as reducing or enlarging) by using a zoom gesture. ).
  • the transparency of the target interface displayed by the electronic device in the projection area may be preset in the electronic device or manually set by the user (for example, the corresponding setting option may be included in the setting interface 601 shown in FIG. 6). in).
  • the display position of the projection area on the touch screen is not limited to the display position in the above drawings, and the user can manually adjust the display position of the projection area on the touch screen.
  • the user can operate the content displayed in the projection area to operate the content in the area that cannot be reached by a finger on the touch screen.
  • the user may perform a third operation in the projection area.
  • the electronic device displays a GUI on the touch screen, which is the same as the GUI displayed by the electronic device in response to the third operation performed by the user in the corresponding position of the sub-interface in the first GUI.
  • the user performs a touch operation on the first control displayed in the projection area.
  • the electronic device may display a second GUI of the first application, and the second GUI and the electronic device respond to the user in the first GUI.
  • the GUI displayed in a touch operation on the first control in a sub-interface is the same.
  • the user performs a touch operation on the second control displayed in the projection area.
  • the electronic device may display a third GUI of the second application program, and the third GUI and the electronic device respond to the user ’s
  • the GUI displayed on a sub-interface (such as the first sub-interface) in a GUI by touching the second control is the same.
  • the operation of the user at the touch point of the projection area may be mapped to the same operation of the user at the corresponding touch point of the sub-interface in the first GUI.
  • the operation of the user at the touch point A of the projection area 1301 can be mapped to the same operation of the user at the touch point a of the sub-interface 1302 in the first GUI, and the user's touch at the projection area 1301
  • the operation at the point B may be mapped to the same operation at the touch point b of the user's sub-interface 1302 in the first GUI.
  • the GUI displayed by the electronic device in response to the user's operation at the touch point A of the projection area 1301 is the same as the GUI displayed by the electronic device in response to the same operation by the user at the touch point a of the sub-interface 1302 in the first GUI.
  • the GUI displayed by the electronic device in response to a user's operation at the touch point B of the projection area 1301 is the same as the GUI displayed by the electronic device in response to the same operation by the user at the touch point b of the sub-interface 1302 in the first GUI.
  • the operation of the user at the touch point where the camera icon displayed in the projection area 1401 can be mapped to the same operation at the touch point where the camera icon is in the sub-interface 1402. That is, as shown in FIG. 14A, the GUI currently displayed by the electronic device is the first GUI of the first application, that is, a sub-screen of the main screen.
  • the electronic device may display a third GUI of the second application, that is, the electronic device display
  • the interface 1403 of the camera is the same as the GUI displayed when the user performs a click operation on the camera icon in the sub-interface 1402.
  • the electronic device responds to the third operation performed by the user in the projection area
  • the specific implementation of displaying the GUI on the touch screen may be: the electronic device may project a sub-interface of the first GUI onto the projection area (such as The bitmap information of the first sub-interface) is stored in a cache.
  • the electronic device receives the user's third operation at the touch point (such as touch point A) in the above-mentioned projection area, it can determine the corresponding position coordinates of touch point A according to the stored bitmap information and the position coordinates of touch point A.
  • the electronic device can respond to the third operation performed on the projection area according to the position coordinates of the touch point a, that is, display the GUI on the touch screen.
  • the electronic device responds to the third operation performed by the user in the projection area
  • the specific implementation of displaying the GUI on the touch screen may be: the electronic device may project a bitmap of a sub-interface of the first GUI onto the projection area.
  • the information, the application package name corresponding to the sub-interface, and the control identification (identify, ID) included in the sub-interface are stored in the cache.
  • the electronic device receives the third operation of the user at the touch point (such as touch point A) in the above-mentioned projection area, it may be determined according to the position coordinates of touch point A, the stored bitmap information, and the control ID included in the sub-interface.
  • the ID of the control operated by the user The electronic device responds to the third operation performed on the projection area according to the ID of the control operated by the user and the stored application package name, that is, displays the GUI on the touch screen.
  • the operation of displaying content on an area that cannot be touched by a finger in the touch screen can be realized in the projection area.
  • the GUI currently displayed on the touch screen into multiple sub-interfaces, and projecting them in the projection area in units of sub-interfaces, it is possible to display the content displayed in areas that cannot be touched by the user's finger in a similar or the same or larger proportion In an area reachable by a user's finger. In this way, without affecting the visual experience and operation experience of the user, the user can conveniently operate the content displayed on the area inaccessible to the finger in the touch screen, thereby achieving efficient interaction between the electronic device and the user.
  • the GUI when the electronic device displays the GUI, such as the second GUI or the third GUI, the GUI may also divide the GUI into multiple sub-interfaces, and project one of the multiple sub-interfaces to The projection area of the touch screen.
  • the GUI when the electronic device displays the GUI, such as the second GUI or the third GUI, the GUI may also be divided into multiple sub-interfaces, and one of the multiple sub-interfaces may be divided into one of the sub-interfaces.
  • the included controls are projected onto the projection area of the touch screen. In this way, it is convenient for the user to operate.
  • the division rule used by the electronic device to divide the second GUI or the third GUI may be the same as the division rule used when dividing the first GUI.
  • the selection of the sub-interface projected onto the projection area and the projection method and the selection of the sub-interface in the first GUI may be the same.
  • the projection method can be the same.
  • the division rule used by the electronic device to divide the second GUI or the third GUI may be different from the division rule used when dividing the first GUI.
  • the selection of the sub-interface projected onto the projection area and the projection method are different from the first.
  • the sub-interface selection and projection method in the GUI can also be different.
  • the electronic device divides the first GUI according to the value of N, and the electronic device may also divide the third GUI according to the same value of N.
  • the electronic device may project the sub-interface 1 (G1) of the six sub-interfaces divided by the third GUI 1501 into the projection area 1502 of the touch screen, which is convenient for the user to continue one-handed operation.
  • the electronic device divides the first GUI according to the value of N, and the value of N is determined according to the number of controls in the GUI currently displayed on the touch screen.
  • the electronic device divides the first GUI into N 1 sub-interfaces according to the number of controls in the first GUI, and projects one of the N 1 sub-interfaces onto a projection area.
  • the user performed a touch operation on the second control in the projection area.
  • the electronic device displays a third GUI.
  • the third GUI has fewer controls than the first GUI includes.
  • the electronic device can divide the third GUI into N 2 sub-interfaces, and N 2 is less than N 1 .
  • the electronic device may further display a second target interface in the projection area, the second target interface is superimposed and displayed on the third GUI, and the content of the second target interface may be the same as one of the N 2 sub-interfaces ( As in the second sub-interface).
  • the electronic device divides the first GUI according to the control layout in the GUI currently displayed on the touch screen.
  • the electronic device can also divide the second GUI according to the control layout in the second GUI.
  • the electronic device divides the first GUI of the first application currently displayed on the touch screen, such as the interface 1601 of Taobao, into nine sub-interfaces, including sub-interface 1 (G1), and The controls 1602 and 1603 included in the sub-interface 1 (G1) are projected into a projection area 1604 of the touch screen.
  • the user performs a touch operation on a first control included in the projection area 1604, such as the control 1605.
  • the electronic device in response to the touch operation, displays a second GUI of the first application program, such as Taobao's scan interface 1606.
  • the GUI may be divided according to the control layout in the scan interface 1606. As shown in FIG. 16B, the electronic device divides the scan interface 1606 into five sub-interfaces, including sub-interface 2 (G2) and sub-interface 3 (G3).
  • the electronic device may project the controls included in the sub-interface 2 (G2) into the projection area 1604 by default.
  • the user can perform a sliding operation in the projection area with a direction to the left (such as 1607 shown in FIG. 16B).
  • the electronic device projects the control 1608 included in the sub-interface 3 (G3) into the projection area 1604 of the touch screen.
  • the user can operate the controls displayed in the projection area 1604, so that the electronic device opens the photo album of the electronic device in response to the user's operation.
  • the electronic device may not divide the scan interface 1606 when it is determined that the second GUI, such as the scan interface 1606, includes fewer controls (for example, the controls included in the second GUI are less than a predetermined threshold). Instead, all the controls included in the scan interface 1606 are projected into the projection area 1604, that is, the electronic device displays at least one control in the projection area, and the at least one control is displayed superimposed on the second GUI (such as the scan interface 1606) Above, the at least one control corresponds to the control included in the second GUI, which is convenient for user operation.
  • the electronic device when the user does not want to use the one-handed operation mode, the electronic device may be triggered to exit the one-handed operation mode, for example, the user may perform a fourth operation.
  • the electronic device exits the one-handed operation mode in response to the fourth operation.
  • the fourth operation may be a specific operation input by a user on a touch screen of the electronic device.
  • the specific operation may be a sliding operation with a specific sliding track.
  • the specific operation is a sliding operation having a sliding trajectory pointing to the lower left corner of the electronic device.
  • the electronic device can exit the one-handed operation mode.
  • the fourth operation may also be a user operation on a virtual button displayed on the touch screen of the electronic device.
  • the fourth operation may also be an operation (such as a tap operation) performed by the user on an area outside the projection area on the touch screen of the electronic device.
  • the electronic device may also automatically exit the one-handed operation mode when it is determined that no operation from the user is received within a preset time.
  • the electronic device may also determine whether to exit the one-handed operation mode based on whether controls are included in an area that cannot be reached when the user holds with one hand on the second GUI or the third GUI. That is, for example, when the electronic device displays the second GUI, it can determine whether the area in the second GUI that the user cannot reach when holding it with one hand contains controls. If the user cannot hold the control in the second GUI with one hand If the area does not contain controls, the electronic device automatically exits the one-handed operation mode.
  • the electronic device executes the above-mentioned division of the second GUI into multiple sub-children. Interface, and projecting one of a plurality of sub-interfaces (or a control included in one of the sub-interfaces) onto a projection area of the touch screen. In this way, it can not only meet the user's needs for one-handed operation, but also automatically exit the one-handed operation mode when there are no controls in the area that cannot be reached when the user holds with one hand on the subsequently displayed GUI, which improves the user experience. Make electronic devices smarter.
  • this embodiment provides a method for displaying an interface.
  • the method may be implemented in an electronic device (such as a mobile phone, a mobile phone, a software structure shown in FIG. 3 and / or a software structure shown in FIG. 4). Tablet, etc.); as shown in FIG. 17, the method may specifically include the following steps:
  • Step 1701 The electronic device displays a first graphical user interface (GUI) of the first application on the touch screen, and the first GUI includes a first sub-interface.
  • GUI graphical user interface
  • the first application program may be a main screen program, and the first GUI of the first application program is a sub-screen included in the main screen.
  • the first application may also be another application, such as a third-party application or a system application, and the first GUI of the first application is any display interface of the application.
  • Step 1702 The electronic device receives an operation of turning on the one-handed operation mode.
  • the operation that the electronic device receives to open the one-handed operation mode may specifically be that the electronic device detects that the holding gesture of the user holding the electronic device is one-handed holding.
  • a sensor configured on the frame of the electronic device may be used to detect a holding gesture of the user holding the electronic device.
  • the electronic device receives the operation of opening the one-handed operation mode.
  • the electronic device may receive the first operation input by the user on the touch screen.
  • the first operation is the sliding operation shown in FIG. 5A described above.
  • the first operation may also be an operation on a virtual button displayed on the touch screen of the electronic device, such as a double-click, a heavy press, or a long-press operation.
  • Step 1703 In response to the above operation, the electronic device determines a projection area.
  • the electronic device may determine the projection area according to a holding gesture of the user holding the electronic device. For example, as shown in FIG. 9A to FIG. 9D described above, when the user holds the electronic device with his left hand, the projection area may be the lower left corner area of the touch screen of the electronic device. When the user holds the electronic device with his right hand, the projection area may be the touch screen of the electronic device. Bottom right corner area.
  • the electronic device may determine the projection area according to the position of the operation on the touch screen. For example, when the position of the above operation on the touch screen is close to the left side of the touch screen of the electronic device, it may be determined that the projection area is the lower left corner area of the touch screen of the electronic device. When the position of the above operation on the touch screen is close to the right side of the touch screen of the electronic device, it can be determined that the projection area is the lower left corner area of the touch screen of the electronic device.
  • Step 1704 The electronic device displays a first target interface in the above-mentioned projection area.
  • the first target interface is superimposed and displayed on the first GUI, and the content of the first target interface is the same as that of the first sub-interface.
  • the projection area is an entire area or a part of the area that can be touched by a finger when the user performs a single-handed operation.
  • the first sub-interface may be a sub-interface in the first GUI that has one or more of the following conditions: it is in the region with the highest operating frequency, includes the most controls, and has the most adjacent sub-interfaces.
  • the above step 1704 may be replaced by: the electronic device displays a control included in the first target interface in the above projection area.
  • the electronic device when the user operates the electronic device with one hand, the electronic device can project one of the sub-interfaces (or the controls included in one of the sub-interfaces in the currently displayed GUI) on the touch screen of the electronic device.
  • the electronic device displays a target interface in the projection area
  • the target interface is superimposed on the currently displayed GUI, and the content of the target interface is the same as the content of the sub-interface, so that In the projection area, the user can operate the content displayed on the area that cannot be touched by a finger on the touch screen. This reduces the difficulty for the user to operate part of the content displayed on the touch screen with one hand, improves the use efficiency of the electronic device, and can also improve the user experience.
  • the display method may further include the following step 1801.
  • Step 1801 The electronic device divides the first GUI into N 1 sub-interfaces, and the N 1 sub-interfaces include a first sub-interface.
  • the electronic device may divide the first GUI into N 1 sub-interfaces according to the value of N (the value of N is N 1 ).
  • the value of N may be pre-configured in the electronic device.
  • the value of N can be different according to the size of the touch screen of the electronic device.
  • the value of N may be manually set by the user.
  • the user can set the value of N in the setting interface 603.
  • the value of N may be automatically configured by the electronic device according to the content included in the first GUI.
  • the electronic device may also divide the first GUI into N 1 sub-interfaces according to the content included in the first GUI (such as the layout of controls in the first GUI).
  • the layout of the controls in the interface 801 of the electronic device WeChat divides the interface 801 of the WeChat into the six sub-interfaces shown in FIG. 8A.
  • the electronic device divides Taobao's interface 802 into nine sub-interfaces as shown in FIG. 8B according to the layout of the controls in Taobao's interface 802.
  • the electronic device projects one of the nine sub-interfaces obtained by dividing the first GUI, such as sub-interface 1 (G1), onto the projection area.
  • the electronic device projects one of the six sub-interfaces obtained by dividing the first GUI, such as sub-interface 1 (G1), onto the projection area.
  • the first sub-interface may include at least one control.
  • one of the nine sub-interfaces obtained by dividing the first GUI by the electronic device includes controls included in the sub-interfaces, such as those included in sub-interface 1 (G1).
  • the control is projected on the projection area.
  • the electronic device divides the GUI currently displayed on the touch screen into multiple sub-interfaces and projects them in the projection area in units of sub-interfaces, so that the content displayed in areas that cannot be touched by a user's finger can be similar or the same or A larger scale is displayed in the area accessible to the user's finger.
  • the user can conveniently operate the content displayed on the area on the touch screen that cannot be reached by a finger.
  • the size of the sub-interface projected onto the projection area may be larger than the size of the first sub-interface.
  • the length of the sub-interface obtained by actual division is L and the width is W
  • the length of the sub-interface projected onto the projection area is (L + R) and the width is (W + R). In this way, it is possible to avoid that the control of the edge area of the obtained sub-interface is difficult to touch.
  • the display effect of the first sub-interface may be different from the display effects of other sub-interfaces in the first GUI.
  • the display effect of the sub-interface 1 (G1) is different from that of other sub-interfaces in the first GUI.
  • the display effect of the first target interface is the same as the display effect of the first sub-interface, and it is different from the display effects of other sub-interfaces in the first GUI.
  • the display effect of the first target interface is the same as that of the sub-interface 1 (G1), and is different from the display effects of the sub-interface 2 (G2) -sub-interface 9 (G9).
  • the above-mentioned projection area coincides with an area where one of the N 1 sub-interfaces is located.
  • the shape of the projection area may be the same as the shape of the first sub-interface, or may be different from the shape of the first sub-interface.
  • the first GUI may include a third sub-interface; the above method may further include the following steps:
  • Step 1901 The electronic device receives a sliding operation in the above-mentioned projection area.
  • the user can perform a sliding operation in the projection area so that other users of the electronic device want to operate the sub-interface Projected into the projection area.
  • the electronic device projects the sub-interface 1 (G1) into the projection area by default. If the sub-interface 1 (G1) is not the sub-interface that the user wants to operate, the user can execute the Slide operation.
  • the electronic device projects the sub-interface 1 (G1) into the projection area by default. If the sub-interface 1 (G1) is not the sub-interface that the user wants to operate, the user can perform the sliding operation shown in FIG. 11A .
  • Step 1902 In response to the sliding operation, the electronic device displays a third target interface in the projection area.
  • the third target interface is superimposed and displayed on the first GUI, and the content of the third target interface is the same as that of the third sub-interface.
  • the electronic device in response to the sliding operation (as shown in FIG. 10A), displays a third target interface in the projection area, the third target interface is superimposed and displayed on the first GUI, and the third target interface The content is the same as that of sub-screen 5 (G5).
  • the electronic device in response to the sliding operation (as shown in FIG. 11A), displays a third target interface in the projection area, and the content of the third target interface is the same as that of the sub-interface 2 (G2).
  • the electronic device can project different sub-interfaces into the projection area according to different directions of the sliding operation.
  • the above step 1902 may be replaced by: the electronic device displays a control included in the third target interface in the projection area.
  • the electronic device displays a control included in the third target interface in the projection area.
  • the electronic device projects one of a plurality of sub-interfaces obtained by dividing the first GUI, such as controls included in sub-interface 2 (G2), onto a projection area.
  • the above method may further include the following steps 2001 to 2002:
  • Step 2001 The electronic device receives a touch operation on the first control in the above-mentioned projection area.
  • Step 2002 In response to the touch operation, the electronic device displays the second GUI of the first application on the touch screen.
  • the second GUI is the same as the GUI displayed by the electronic device in response to a user's touch operation on the first control in the first sub-interface.
  • the electronic device may display the second GUI of the first application, that is, the sweeping interface of Taobao. It is the same as the GUI displayed by the electronic device in response to a user's touch operation on a control 1602 in a corresponding sub-interface (such as sub-interface 1 (G1)).
  • the second GUI when the electronic device displays the second GUI, the second GUI may be divided using the same division rule as the first GUI.
  • the number of sub-interfaces obtained by dividing the second GUI may be the same as or different from the number of sub-interfaces obtained by dividing the first GUI.
  • the electronic device divides the first GUI according to the control layout in the GUI.
  • the electronic device can also scan the scan according to the control layout in the interface 1606. The scan interface 1606 is divided, and the number of sub-interfaces obtained by the division is 5, which is different from the number of sub-interfaces obtained by the first GUI division of 9.
  • the number of controls included in the second GUI is less than a predetermined threshold.
  • the above method may further include the following steps 2003:
  • Step 2003 The electronic device displays at least one control in the above-mentioned projection area.
  • the at least one control is superimposed and displayed on the second GUI, and the at least one control is the same as the control included in the second GUI.
  • the second GUI is the scan interface 1606.
  • the electronic device may not divide the scan interface 1606, but project all the controls included in the scan interface 1606 into the projection area, which is convenient for users to operate.
  • the above method may further include the following steps 2101 to 2102:
  • Step 2101 The electronic device receives a touch operation on the second control in the above-mentioned projection area.
  • Step 2102 In response to the touch operation, the electronic device displays a third GUI of the second application on the touch screen.
  • the third GUI is the same as the GUI displayed by the electronic device in response to a user's touch operation on the second control in the first sub-interface.
  • the user performs a touch operation on the projection area, such as a camera icon, such as a click operation
  • the electronic device may display a third GUI of the second application, that is, the electronic device display
  • the interface of the camera is the same as the GUI displayed by the electronic device in response to a user performing a click operation on a camera icon in a corresponding sub-interface (such as the sub-interface 1402).
  • the third GUI when the electronic device displays the third GUI, the third GUI may be divided using the same division rule as the first GUI. For example, the electronic device divides the first GUI into six sub-interfaces. As shown in FIG. 15 above, the electronic device may also divide the third GUI into six sub-interfaces.
  • the third GUI includes fewer controls than the first GUI includes.
  • the above method may further include the following steps 2103-2104:
  • Step 2103 The electronic device divides the third GUI into N 2 sub-interfaces.
  • the N 2 sub-interfaces include a second sub-interface, and N 2 is less than N 1 .
  • the electronic device divides the first GUI according to the value of N, and the value of N is determined according to the number of controls in the GUI currently displayed on the touch screen. For example, the electronic device divides the first GUI into N 1 sub-interfaces according to the number of controls in the first GUI, and projects one of the N 1 sub-interfaces onto a projection area. The user performed a touch operation on the second control in the projection area. In response to the touch operation, the electronic device displays a third GUI. The third GUI has fewer controls than the first GUI. The electronic device can divide the third GUI into N 2 sub-interfaces.
  • Step 2104 The electronic device displays a second target interface in the projection area.
  • the second target interface is superimposed and displayed on the third GUI.
  • the content of the second target interface is the same as that of the second sub-interface.
  • one of the sub-interfaces in the third GUI may be projected onto the projection area, which is convenient for the user to continue one-handed operation.
  • step 2104 may be replaced by: the electronic device displays the control included in the second target interface in the projection area.
  • the above method may further include: the electronic device receives a touch operation outside the projection area of the user on the touch screen. In response to the touch operation, the electronic device exits the one-handed operation mode.
  • the size of the first target interface is the same as the size of the first sub-interface, and the size of the first sub-interface is different from the sizes of other sub-interfaces in the first GUI.
  • the above-mentioned superimposed display means that the first target interface is suspended and displayed on the first GUI.
  • the above-mentioned overlay display means that the first target interface is displayed on the first GUI, and the first GUI performs Gaussian blur processing.
  • this embodiment provides another interface display method.
  • the method may be implemented in an electronic device (such as a mobile phone) having a hardware structure shown in FIG. 3 and / or a software structure shown in FIG. 4. , Tablet, etc.); as shown in FIG. 22, the method may specifically include the following steps:
  • Step 2201 The electronic device displays the first GUI of the first application on the touch screen.
  • Step 2202 The electronic device receives an operation of turning on the one-handed operation mode.
  • the operation for turning on the one-handed operation mode may be the sliding operation shown in FIG. 5A.
  • Step 2203 In response to the above operation, the electronic device determines a projection area, which is an area that can be touched by a finger when the user operates the electronic device with one hand.
  • the above-mentioned projection area may be the above-mentioned projection area shown in any one of FIGS. 9A-9D.
  • Step 2204 The electronic device divides the first GUI into N 1 sub-interfaces.
  • the N 1 sub-interface includes a first sub-interface.
  • the electronic device displays a first target interface in a projection area, and the first target interface is superimposed and displayed on the first sub-interface. Above a GUI, the content of the first target interface is the same as the content of the first sub-interface.
  • Step 2204 may be replaced by: the electronic device divides the first GUI into N 1 sub-interfaces, and the N 1 sub-interfaces include the first sub-interface, and the electronic device displays controls included in the first target interface in the projection area, and the first target The controls included in the interface are superimposed and displayed on the first GUI, and the content of the first target interface is the same as that of the first sub-interface.
  • Step 2205 The electronic device receives a first touch operation on the first control in the above-mentioned projection area.
  • Step 2206 In response to the first touch operation, the electronic device displays a second GUI of the first application on the touch screen, and the number of controls in the second GUI is less than a predetermined threshold.
  • Step 2207 The electronic device displays at least one control in the projection area.
  • the at least one control is superimposed on the second GUI.
  • the at least one control is the same as the control included in the second GUI.
  • the at least one control includes the second control. Controls.
  • the second GUI is the scan interface 1606 shown in FIG. 16B. If the number of controls included in the second GUI is less than a predetermined threshold, the interface may not be divided, but the controls in the interface may be projected on the projection area.
  • Step 2208 The electronic device receives a second touch operation on the second control in the above-mentioned projection area.
  • the second control may be the album button shown in FIG. 16B described above.
  • Step 2209 In response to the second touch operation, the electronic device displays a third GUI of the second application on the touch screen, and the third GUI includes fewer controls than the first GUI.
  • the electronic device may display an interface of the album on the touch screen.
  • Step 2210 The electronic device divides the third GUI into N 2 sub-interfaces.
  • the N 2 sub-interfaces include a second sub-interface, and N 2 is less than N 1.
  • a second target interface is displayed in the projection area, and the second target interface is superimposed and displayed.
  • the content of the second target interface is the same as the content of the second sub-interface.
  • the electronic device After the electronic device displays the second target interface in the projection area, when the electronic device detects a third touch operation on the third control in the projection area, in response to the third touch operation, the electronic device displays a fourth on the touch screen. GUI; the electronic device determines whether to determine the projection area according to the content of the fourth GUI. If the projection area is to be determined, the electronic device may determine the projection area and divide the fourth GUI into N 3 sub-interfaces, and the N 3 sub-interfaces include a third sub-interface.
  • a third target interface is displayed in the projection area, and the third target interface is superimposed on the fourth GUI, and the content of the third target interface is the same as that of the third sub-interface; if the projection area is not determined, the electronic device
  • the fourth GUI may not be divided, that is, the fourth GUI is displayed normally.
  • the electronic device when the user operates the electronic device with one hand, the electronic device can project one of the sub-interfaces in the GUI currently displayed on the touch screen of the electronic device onto an area accessible to the user's finger on the touch screen, that is, the electronic device.
  • a target interface is displayed in the projection area, the target interface is superimposed on the currently displayed GUI, and the content of the target interface is the same as the content of the sub-interface, so that the user can realize that the finger on the touch screen cannot be reached in the projection area.
  • the operation of the content displayed on the area This reduces the difficulty for the user to operate part of the content displayed on the touch screen with one hand, improves the use efficiency of the electronic device, and can also improve the user experience.
  • the electronic device can divide or not divide the GUI by using a division scheme suitable for the characteristics of the GUI, so that the interface division of the electronic device is more intelligent, and the user is improved.
  • a division scheme suitable for the characteristics of the GUI so that the interface division of the electronic device is more intelligent, and the user is improved.
  • This embodiment also provides another interface display method.
  • the electronic device may divide the GUI currently displayed on the touch screen into M sub-interfaces (M is an integer greater than or equal to 2).
  • the electronic device may project multiple sub-interfaces out of the M sub-interfaces into multiple projection areas of the electronic device, respectively.
  • the sizes and shapes of the plurality of projection areas may be the same or different.
  • the electronic device may display a first target interface in the first projection area, the first target interface is superimposed and displayed on the GUI, and the content of the first target interface and the first sub-interface among the M sub-interfaces The content of is the same; the second target interface is displayed in the second projection area, the second target interface is superimposed on the GUI, and the content of the second target interface is the same as the content of the second sub-interface among the M sub-interfaces .
  • the electronic device projects the controls included in the multiple sub-interfaces among the M sub-interfaces respectively on multiple projection areas of the electronic device.
  • the electronic device may display controls included in the first target interface in the projection area, and the controls included in the first target interface are superimposed and displayed on the GUI, and the content of the first target interface and the M sub-interfaces
  • the content of the first sub-interface is the same; the controls included in the second target interface are displayed in the second projection area, and the controls included in the second target interface are superimposed and displayed on the GUI, and the The content is the same as that of the second sub-interface among the M sub-interfaces.
  • the multiple projection areas may be located on the same side of the touch screen of the electronic device, or may be located on different sides of the touch screen of the electronic device.
  • the electronic device may project two of the M sub-interfaces into two projection areas of the electronic device, and the two projection areas may be located on the same side of the touch screen of the electronic device, such as the lower left corner or the lower right corner of the touch screen.
  • the two projection areas may also be located on different sides of the touch screen of the electronic device, for example, one of the projection areas is located at the lower left corner of the touch screen, and the other projection area is located at the lower right corner of the touch screen.
  • the electronic device may divide a GUI currently displayed on the touch screen, such as WeChat interface 2301, into six sub-interfaces, including sub-interface 1 (G1) and sub-interface 2 (G2).
  • the electronic device may project the controls included in the sub-interface 1 (G1) into the first projection area 2302 of the touch screen, and project the controls included in the sub-interface 2 (G2) into the second projection area 2303 of the touch screen.
  • the electronic device may not divide the GUI currently displayed on the touch screen, but may project different types of controls to different projection areas according to different types of controls included in the GUI currently displayed on the touch screen. .
  • the operation of the electronic device on the content displayed in the projection area may be mapped to the operation of the electronic device on the corresponding content in the GUI.
  • the electronic device may display other GUIs in response to the operation, and for the displayed other GUIs, it can still divide it and project its sub-interface to the projection area.
  • the foregoing electronic device includes a hardware structure and / or a software module corresponding to performing each function.
  • this embodiment can be implemented in the form of hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a certain function is performed by hardware or computer software-driven hardware depends on the specific application of the technical solution and design constraints. Professional technicians can use different methods to implement the described functions for each specific application, but such implementation should not be considered to be beyond the scope of this embodiment.
  • This embodiment also provides an electronic device that implements the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the electronic device may be divided into functional modules, for example, each functional module may be divided corresponding to each function, or two or more functions may be integrated into one processing module.
  • the above integrated modules may be implemented in the form of hardware or software functional modules. It should be noted that the division of the modules in this embodiment is schematic, and is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be another division manner.
  • FIG. 24 shows a possible structural diagram of an electronic device involved in the foregoing embodiment.
  • the electronic device may include: a display unit 2401, an input unit 2402, and a determination. Unit 2403.
  • the display unit 2401 is configured to support an electronic device to perform the display operations and steps in steps 1701, 1704, 1902, 2002, step 2003, step 2102, step 2104, step 2201, and step 2204 in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the input unit may be a touch screen or other hardware or a combination of hardware and software.
  • the input unit 2402 is configured to receive a user's input on the display interface of the electronic device, such as touch input, voice input, gesture input, hover operation, etc.
  • the input unit 2402 is configured to support the electronic device to perform step 1702 in the above method embodiment. Step 1901, step 2001, step 2101, step 2202, step 2205, step 2208, and / or other processes for the techniques described herein.
  • the input unit 2402 may be a touch screen or other hardware or a combination of hardware and software.
  • the determining unit 2403 is configured to support the electronic device to perform steps 1703, 2203, and / or other processes used in the techniques described herein.
  • the electronic device may further include a dividing unit 2404.
  • the dividing unit 2404 is configured to support the electronic device to perform step 1801, step 2103, step 2204, division operation in step 2210, and / or other processes used in the techniques described herein.
  • the electronic device includes but is not limited to the above-mentioned unit modules.
  • the electronic device may further include a receiving unit for receiving data or signals sent by other devices, and a sending unit for sending data or signals to other devices.
  • the functions that can be implemented by the above functional units also include, but are not limited to, the functions corresponding to the method steps described in the above examples. For detailed descriptions of other units of the electronic device, refer to the detailed description of the corresponding method steps. I will not repeat them here.
  • FIG. 25 shows a possible structural schematic diagram of the electronic device involved in the foregoing embodiment.
  • the electronic device may include a processing module 2501, a storage module 2502, and a display module 2503.
  • the processing module 2501 is configured to control and manage the actions of the electronic device.
  • the display module 2503 is configured to perform content display according to an instruction of the processing module 2501.
  • the storage module 2502 is configured to store program codes and data of the electronic device.
  • the electronic device may further include an input module and a communication module, and the communication module is configured to support communication between the electronic device and other network entities to implement functions such as electronic device calls, data interaction, and Internet access.
  • the processing module 2501 may be a processor or a controller.
  • the communication module may be a transceiver, an RF circuit, or a communication interface.
  • the storage module 2502 may be a memory.
  • the display module may be a screen or a display.
  • the input module may be a touch screen, a voice input device, or a fingerprint sensor.
  • the processing module 2501 is a processor
  • the storage module 2502 is a memory
  • the display module 2503 is a touch screen
  • the electronic device provided in this embodiment may be the electronic device shown in FIG. 3.
  • the communication module may include not only an RF circuit, but also a Wi-Fi module, an NFC module, and a Bluetooth module. Communication modules such as RF circuits, NFC modules, Wi-Fi modules, and Bluetooth modules can be collectively referred to as communication interfaces.
  • the processor, the RF circuit, the touch screen, and the memory may be coupled together through a bus.
  • the electronic device may include: a touch screen 2601, wherein the touch screen 2601 may include a touch-sensitive surface 2606 and a display screen 2607; and one or more processors 2602. Memory 2603; and one or more computer programs 2604, each of which may be connected through one or more communication buses 2605.
  • the one or more computer programs 2604 are stored in the memory 2603, and are configured to be executed by the one or more processors 2602.
  • the one or more computer programs 2604 include instructions.
  • the above The instructions may be used to perform various steps performed by the electronic device as shown in FIG. 17 and corresponding embodiments. In some other embodiments, the foregoing instructions may also be used to execute steps performed by the electronic device in FIG.
  • the foregoing instructions may also be used to perform steps performed by the electronic device in FIG. 19 and corresponding embodiments. In other embodiments, the foregoing instructions may also be used to perform steps performed by the electronic device in FIG. 20 and corresponding embodiments. In other embodiments, the foregoing instructions may also be used to execute steps performed by the electronic device in FIG. 21 and the corresponding embodiments. In other embodiments, the foregoing instructions may also be used to execute steps performed by the electronic device in FIG. 22 and corresponding embodiments.
  • the electronic device includes but is not limited to the above-listed devices.
  • the above-mentioned electronic device may further include a radio frequency circuit, a positioning device, a sensor, and the like. When the electronic device includes other devices, the above-mentioned electronic device may be as shown in FIG. Electronic equipment shown below.
  • This embodiment also provides a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the computer-readable storage medium includes instructions. When the instructions are run on an electronic device, the electronic device is caused to execute FIG. 17, FIG. 18, FIG. 19, and FIG. 20. The relevant method steps in any of FIG. 21, FIG. 21, or FIG. 22 to implement the interface display method in the foregoing embodiment.
  • This embodiment also provides a computer program product containing instructions.
  • the computer program product runs on an electronic device, the electronic device is executed as shown in FIG. 17, FIG. 18, FIG. 19, FIG. 20, FIG. 21, or FIG. 22 Relevant method steps in any of the drawings to implement the interface display method in the above embodiment.
  • This embodiment also provides a control device.
  • the control device includes a processor and a memory.
  • the memory is used to store computer program code, and the computer program code includes computer instructions.
  • the control device executes the related method steps in any one of the drawings such as FIG. 17, FIG. 18, FIG. 19, FIG. 20, FIG. 21, or FIG. 22 to implement the interface display method in the above embodiment.
  • the control device can be an integrated circuit IC or a system-on-chip SOC.
  • the integrated circuit may be a general-purpose integrated circuit, a field-programmable gate array FPGA, or an application-specific integrated circuit ASIC.
  • This embodiment also provides an interface display device.
  • the device has a function of realizing the behavior of an electronic device in the above method.
  • the functions may be implemented by hardware, and may also be implemented by hardware executing corresponding software.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the functions described above.
  • the electronic device, computer storage medium, computer program product, or control device provided in this embodiment is used to execute the corresponding methods provided above. Therefore, for the beneficial effects that can be achieved, refer to the corresponding methods provided above. The beneficial effects in the method are not repeated here.
  • the disclosed systems, devices, and methods may be implemented in other ways.
  • the device embodiments described above are only schematic.
  • the division of the modules or units is only a logical function division.
  • multiple units or components may be divided.
  • the combination can either be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not implemented.
  • the displayed or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, which may be electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, may be located in one place, or may be distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the objective of the solution of this embodiment.
  • the functional units in the various embodiments of this embodiment may be integrated into one processing unit, or each of the units may exist separately physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the above integrated unit may be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of software functional unit.
  • the integrated unit When the integrated unit is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of this embodiment is essentially a part that contributes to the existing technology or all or part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, which is stored in a storage medium.
  • the instructions include a number of instructions for causing a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device) or a processor to perform all or part of the steps of the methods described in the embodiments.
  • the foregoing storage media include: flash media, mobile hard disks, read-only memories, random access memories, magnetic disks, or optical discs, which can store program codes.

Abstract

The present embodiments relate to the field of electronic devices. Disclosed are an interface display method and an electronic device, for use in solving the problem of being difficult to operate some of the content displayed on a touchscreen when a user holds a mobile phone with a single hand. The electronic device displays a first GUI of a first application on the touchscreen of the electronic device, the first GUI comprising a first sub-interface; the electronic device receives an operation of enabling a single hand operation mode; in response to the operation, the electronic device determines a projection area, the projection area being an area that can be touched by fingers of the user during a single hand operation; the electronic device displays a first target interface in the projection area, the first target interface being superimposed on the first GUI for display; the content of the first target interface being the same as that of the first sub-interface.

Description

界面的显示方法及电子设备Interface display method and electronic equipment 技术领域Technical field
本实施例涉及电子设备领域,尤其涉及一种界面的显示方法及电子设备。This embodiment relates to the field of electronic devices, and in particular, to a display method of an interface and an electronic device.
背景技术Background technique
如今,手机已成为人们日常生活和工作中必不可少的通讯工具,且目前触屏手机的应用最为广泛。随着手机屏幕技术的不断发展,触屏手机的触摸屏尺寸也越来越大,从早期流行的3英寸,到4英寸,再到5英寸,6英寸等。而趋于大屏化的触屏手机,如图1所示,在用户单手(左手或右手)握持手机时,由于用户拇指可触及的区域(如图1中所示的扇形区域)非常有限,导致触摸屏上显示的内容(如图1中所示的扇形区域外的内容)用户操作起来非常困难。Today, mobile phones have become an essential communication tool in people's daily life and work, and touch screen mobile phones are currently the most widely used. With the continuous development of mobile phone screen technology, the touch screen size of touch screen mobile phones is also getting larger and larger, from the popular 3 inches, to 4 inches, to 5 inches, 6 inches, etc. in the early days. As for the large-screen touch-screen mobile phones, as shown in FIG. 1, when the user holds the mobile phone with one hand (left hand or right hand), since the area accessible by the user's thumb (such as the fan-shaped area shown in FIG. 1) is very Limited, causing the content displayed on the touch screen (such as content outside the fan-shaped area shown in FIG. 1) to be very difficult for the user to operate.
在现有技术中,当用户单手握持手机时,可以通过将手机触摸屏上显示的内容以一定的比例缩小后显示在触摸屏的特定区域,以使得用户拇指能够触及到更多在触摸屏上显示的内容。例如,如图2A所示,当用户左手握持手机时,手机可以将触摸屏上当前显示的内容以一定比例缩小后显示在触摸屏的左下角区域,如图2B所示,当用户右手握持手机时,手机可以将触摸屏上当前显示的内容以一定比例缩小后显示在触摸屏的右下角区域。In the prior art, when a user holds a mobile phone with one hand, the content displayed on the touch screen of the mobile phone can be reduced by a certain ratio and displayed in a specific area of the touch screen, so that the user's thumb can touch more of the display on the touch screen. Content. For example, as shown in FIG. 2A, when the user holds the mobile phone with his left hand, the mobile phone can reduce the content currently displayed on the touch screen by a certain ratio and display it in the lower left corner of the touch screen. As shown in FIG. 2B, when the user holds the mobile phone with his right hand , The mobile phone can reduce the content currently displayed on the touch screen by a certain ratio and display it in the lower right corner area of the touch screen.
但现有技术存在的问题是:在用户单手握持手机时,将触摸屏上显示的内容以一定比例缩小后显示在触摸屏的特定区域的情况下,仍有部分区域用户手指是无法触及的,如,图2A或图2B中所示的阴影区域。However, a problem existing in the prior art is that when a user holds a mobile phone with one hand, the content displayed on the touch screen is reduced by a certain proportion and displayed in a specific area of the touch screen. In some areas, the user's finger cannot be reached. For example, the shaded area shown in FIG. 2A or 2B.
发明内容Summary of the Invention
本实施例提供一种界面的显示方法及电子设备,解决了用户在单手握持手机时,触摸屏上显示的部分内容操作起来比较困难的问题。This embodiment provides an interface display method and an electronic device, which solves a problem that it is difficult to operate a part of content displayed on a touch screen when a user holds a mobile phone with one hand.
为达到上述目的,本实施例采用如下技术方案:To achieve the above purpose, this embodiment adopts the following technical solution:
第一方面,本实施例提供一种界面的显示方法,该方法可以在具有触摸屏的电子设备中实现,该方法可以包括:电子设备在该电子设备的触摸屏上显示第一应用程序的第一图形用户界面(GUI),在检测到开启单手操作模式的操作时,响应于该操作,电子设备确定投影区域,该投影区域可以是用户单手操作该电子设备时手指可触及的全部区域或部分区域,电子设备在该投影区域显示第一目标界面,该第一目标界面叠加显示在上述第一GUI之上,该第一目标界面的内容与上述第一子界面的内容相同。In a first aspect, this embodiment provides a method for displaying an interface. The method may be implemented in an electronic device having a touch screen. The method may include: the electronic device displays a first graphic of a first application on the touch screen of the electronic device. A user interface (GUI). When an operation for turning on the one-handed operation mode is detected, in response to the operation, the electronic device determines a projection area, and the projection area may be all or part of the area accessible by a finger when the user operates the electronic device with one hand. Area, the electronic device displays a first target interface in the projection area, the first target interface is superimposed and displayed on the first GUI, and the content of the first target interface is the same as the content of the first sub-interface.
本实施例提供的技术方案,电子设备能够在用户单手操作电子设备时,将电子设备触摸屏上当前显示的GUI中的其中一个子界面,投射到触摸屏上用户手指可触及的区域,即电子设备在投影区域内显示一目标界面,该目标界面叠加显示在当前显示的GUI之上,且该目标界面的内容与该子界面的内容相同,使得用户在投影区域中可以实现对触摸屏上手指无法触及的区域上显示的内容的操作。这样,降低了用户单手操作触摸屏上显示的部分内容的难度,提高了电子设备的使用效率,同时也能提高用户 体验。According to the technical solution provided in this embodiment, when the user operates the electronic device with one hand, the electronic device can project one of the sub-interfaces in the GUI currently displayed on the touch screen of the electronic device onto an area accessible to the user's finger on the touch screen, that is, the electronic device. A target interface is displayed in the projection area, the target interface is superimposed on the currently displayed GUI, and the content of the target interface is the same as the content of the sub-interface, so that the user can realize that the finger on the touch screen cannot be reached in the projection area. The operation of the content displayed on the area. This reduces the difficulty for the user to operate part of the content displayed on the touch screen with one hand, improves the use efficiency of the electronic device, and also improves the user experience.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该界面的显示方法还可以包括:电子设备将上述第一GUI划分为N 1个子界面,该N 1个子界面中包括上述第一子界面。这样,电子设备通过将触摸屏上当前显示的GUI划分为多个子界面,并以子界面为单位投射在投影区域中,使得可以将用户手指无法触及的区域显示的内容显示在用户手指可触及的区域中。如此,便可以在不影响用户视觉体验和操作体验的同时,使得用户可以便捷的对触摸屏上手指无法触及的区域上显示的内容进行操作。 In a possible implementation manner, the method for displaying the interface may further include: the electronic device divides the first GUI into N 1 sub-interfaces, and the N 1 sub-interfaces include the first sub-interfaces. In this way, the electronic device divides the GUI currently displayed on the touch screen into a plurality of sub-interfaces, and projects the sub-interfaces in the projection area, so that the content displayed in the area that cannot be touched by the user's finger can be displayed in the area that can be touched by the user's finger. in. In this way, without affecting the visual experience and operation experience of the user, the user can conveniently operate the content displayed on the area on the touch screen that cannot be reached by a finger.
在一种可能的实现方式中,上述电子设备在投影区域显示第一目标界面,可以替换为:电子设备在投影区域显示该第一目标界面包括的控件。这样,电子设备通过将电子设备触摸屏上当前显示的GUI中的其中一个子界面包括的控件,投射到触摸屏上用户手指可触及的区域内,使得用户在投影区域中可以实现对触摸屏上手指无法触及的区域上显示的内容的操作,提高了电子设备的使用效率,同时也能提高用户体验。In a possible implementation manner, the foregoing electronic device displays the first target interface in the projection area, which may be replaced by: the electronic device displays the controls included in the first target interface in the projection area. In this way, the electronic device projects a control included in one of the sub-interfaces of the GUI currently displayed on the touch screen of the electronic device into an area reachable by a user's finger on the touch screen, so that the user can realize that the finger on the touch screen cannot be reached in the projection area. The operation of the content displayed on the area improves the use efficiency of the electronic device and also improves the user experience.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该界面的显示方法还可以包括:电子设备在检测到针对投影区域中的第一控件的触摸操作时,响应于该触摸操作,电子设备可以在触摸屏上显示第一应用程序的第二GUI,该第二GUI与电子设备响应于用户在第一子界面中对所述第一控件的触摸操作所显示的GUI相同。这样,用户在投影区域中的触摸操作,可以映射为用户在第一子界面中的相同位置的触摸操作,从而在投影区域实现了单手操作时对手指无法触及的区域的操作;如果第二GUI中包括的控件数量小于预定阈值,电子设备在上述投影区域显示至少一个控件,该至少一个控件叠加显示在上述第二GUI之上,至少一个控件与第二GUI包括的控件一一相同。这样,电子设备在触摸屏上当前显示的GUI包括的控件数量较少时,不对该GUI进行划分,而是将第二GUI种包括的所有控件投射在投影区域,不仅能确保用户单手操作时能够便捷的对手指无法触及的区域进行操作,而且还不影响用户的视觉体验。In a possible implementation manner, the display method of the interface may further include: when the electronic device detects a touch operation with respect to the first control in the projection area, in response to the touch operation, the electronic device may display the first operation on the touch screen. An application's second GUI, which is the same as the GUI displayed by the electronic device in response to a user's touch operation on the first control in the first sub-interface. In this way, the user's touch operation in the projection area can be mapped to the user's touch operation at the same position in the first sub-interface, thereby realizing the operation of the area that cannot be touched by the finger when the one-hand operation is performed in the projection area; if the second The number of controls included in the GUI is less than a predetermined threshold. The electronic device displays at least one control in the above-mentioned projection area. The at least one control is superimposed and displayed on the second GUI. At least one control is the same as the controls included in the second GUI. In this way, when the GUI currently displayed on the touch screen of the electronic device includes a small number of controls, the GUI is not divided, but all controls included in the second GUI are projected on the projection area, which not only ensures that the user can operate with one hand Conveniently operate areas that are not reachable by fingers, without affecting the user's visual experience.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该界面的显示方法还可以包括:电子设备在检测到针对投影区域中的第二控件的触摸操作时,响应于该触摸操作,电子设备可以在触摸屏上显示第二应用程序的第三GUI,该第三GUI与电子设备响应于用户在第一子界面中对第二控件的触摸操作所显示的GUI相同;如果第三GUI中包括的控件少于第一GUI中包括的控件,电子设备将上述第三GUI划分为N 2个子界面,该N 2个子界面包括第二子界面,N 2小于N 1;电子设备在投影区域显示第二目标界面,该第二目标界面叠加显示在上述第三GUI之上,该第二目标界面的内容与第二子界面的内容相同。这样,电子设备能够根据触摸屏上当前显示的GUI包括的控件数量的不同对GUI进行划分,如GUI包括的控件越少,划分得到的子界面数量越少,使得电子设备的界面划分更加能够贴合触摸屏上显示的GUI的特点,使得电子设备更加智能,同时也提高了用户体验。 In a possible implementation manner, the display method of the interface may further include: when the electronic device detects a touch operation with respect to the second control in the projection area, in response to the touch operation, the electronic device may display the first operation on the touch screen. The third GUI of the two applications, which is the same as the GUI displayed by the electronic device in response to the user's touch operation on the second control in the first sub-interface; if the third GUI includes fewer controls than the first GUI In the control included in the electronic device, the third GUI is divided into N 2 sub-interfaces, and the N 2 sub-interfaces include the second sub-interface, and N 2 is less than N 1 ; the electronic device displays a second target interface in the projection area, and the second The target interface is superimposed and displayed on the third GUI, and the content of the second target interface is the same as that of the second sub-interface. In this way, the electronic device can divide the GUI according to the difference in the number of controls included in the GUI currently displayed on the touch screen. For example, the fewer controls the GUI includes, the fewer the number of sub-interfaces can be obtained, making the interface division of the electronic device more suitable. The characteristics of the GUI displayed on the touch screen make electronic devices more intelligent and improve the user experience.
在一种可能的实现方式中,上述第一GUI还可以包括第三子界面,该界面的显示方法还可以包括:电子设备在检测到在投影区域中的滑动操作时,响应于该滑动操作,电子设备可以在投影区域显示第三目标界面,该第三目标界面叠加显示在上述第一GUI之上,该第三目标界面的内容与上述第三子界面的内容相同。这样,可以便于用户在投影区域中对第一GUI中的各个子界面进行操作,提高了用户体验。In a possible implementation manner, the first GUI may further include a third sub-interface, and the display method of the interface may further include: when the electronic device detects a sliding operation in the projection area, in response to the sliding operation, The electronic device may display a third target interface in the projection area, and the third target interface is superimposed and displayed on the first GUI, and the content of the third target interface is the same as that of the third sub-interface. In this way, it is convenient for the user to operate each sub-interface in the first GUI in the projection area, and the user experience is improved.
在一种可能的实现方式中,投影区域与N 1个子界面中的一个子界面所在的区域重合;或第一目标界面的尺寸大于第一子界面的尺寸;或第一子界面的显示效果与第一GUI中其他子界面的显示效果不同;或第一目标界面的显示效果与第一子界面的显示效果相同,且第一目标界面的显示效果与第一GUI中其他子界面的显示效果不同;或第一目标界面的尺寸与第一子界面的尺寸相同,且第一子界面的尺寸与第一GUI中的其他子界面的尺寸不同;或在将第一GUI划分为N 1个子界面后,子界面的轮廓线叠加显示在第一GUI之上;或第一子界面所在的区域的操作频率高于第一GUI中其他子界面所在的区域的操作频率;或第一子界面包括的控件多于第一GUI中其他任一子界面包括的控件;或上述叠加显示是指第一目标界面悬浮显示在第一GUI之上;或上述叠加显示是指第一目标界面显示在第一GUI之上,且第一GUI做高斯模糊处理;或N 1等于9,且N 2等于6。 In a possible implementation manner, the projection area coincides with the area where one of the N 1 sub-interfaces is located; or the size of the first target interface is larger than the size of the first sub-interface; or the display effect of the first sub-interface is the same as The display effect of other sub-interfaces in the first GUI is different; or the display effect of the first target interface is the same as that of the first sub-interface, and the display effect of the first target interface is different from the display effect of other sub-interfaces in the first GUI ; Or the size of the first target interface is the same as the size of the first sub-interface, and the size of the first sub-interface is different from that of other sub-interfaces in the first GUI; or after the first GUI is divided into N 1 sub-interfaces , The outline of the sub-interface is superimposed and displayed on the first GUI; or the operating frequency of the area where the first sub-interface is located is higher than that of the other sub-interfaces in the first GUI; or the controls included in the first sub-interface There are more controls than any other sub-interface in the first GUI; or the above-mentioned superimposed display means that the first target interface is suspended and displayed on the first GUI; or the above-mentioned superimposed display means the first target interface Displayed on the first GUI, the first GUI and do Gaussian blurring; 9 or equal to N 1 and N 2 is equal to 6.
第二方面,本实施例提供一种界面的显示方法,该方法可以在具有触摸屏的电子设备中实现,该方法可以包括:In a second aspect, this embodiment provides a method for displaying an interface. The method may be implemented in an electronic device having a touch screen. The method may include:
电子设备在触摸屏上显示第一应用程序的第一GUI,在检测到开启单手操作模式的操作时,响应于该操作,电子设备可以确定投影区域,该投影区域可以为用户单手操作电子设备时手指可触及的全部区域或部分区域;电子设备将上述第一GUI划分为N 1个子界面,该N 1个子界面包括第一子界面,电子设备在投影区域显示第一目标界面,该第一目标界面叠加显示在上述第一GUI之上,该第一目标界面的内容与第一子界面的内容相同;电子设备在检测到针对投影区域中的第一控件的第一触摸操作时,响应于该第一触摸操作,电子设备在触摸屏上显示第一应用程序的第二GUI,该第二GUI与电子设备响应于用户在第一子界面中对第一控件的触摸操作所显示的GUI相同,该第二GUI中的控件数量小于预定阈值;电子设备在投影区域显示至少一个控件,该至少一个控件叠加显示在上述第二GUI之上,该至少一个控件与第二GUI包括的控件一一相同,该至少一个控件中包括第二控件;电子设备在检测到针对投影区域中的第二控件的第二触摸操作时,响应于该第二触摸操作,在触摸屏上显示第二应用程序的第三GUI,该第三GUI与电子设备响应于用户在上述第二GUI中对第二控件的触摸操作所显示的GUI相同,第三GUI中包括的控件少于第一GUI中包括的控件,电子设备将第三GUI划分为N 2个子界面,该N 2个子界面包括第二子界面,N 2小于N 1,电子设备在投影区域显示第二目标界面,该第二目标界面叠加显示在第三GUI之上,该第二目标界面的内容与第二子界面的内容相同。 The electronic device displays the first GUI of the first application on the touch screen. When an operation of turning on the one-handed operation mode is detected, the electronic device can determine a projection area in response to the operation, and the projection area can be used by the user to operate the electronic device with one hand. All or part of the area that can be touched by a finger; the electronic device divides the above-mentioned first GUI into N 1 sub-interfaces, the N 1 sub-interfaces including the first sub-interface, and the electronic device displays a first target interface in the projection area, the first The target interface is superimposed and displayed on the first GUI, and the content of the first target interface is the same as that of the first sub-interface; when the electronic device detects a first touch operation with respect to the first control in the projection area, it responds to For the first touch operation, the electronic device displays the second GUI of the first application on the touch screen, and the second GUI is the same as the GUI displayed by the electronic device in response to the user's touch operation on the first control in the first sub-interface. The number of controls in the second GUI is less than a predetermined threshold; the electronic device displays at least one control in the projection area, and the at least one control is superimposed on the display. Above the second GUI, the at least one control is identical to the controls included in the second GUI, and the at least one control includes the second control; the electronic device detects a second touch for the second control in the projection area In operation, in response to the second touch operation, a third GUI of the second application is displayed on the touch screen, and the third GUI and the electronic device are displayed in response to a user's touch operation on the second control in the second GUI. The GUI is the same. The control included in the third GUI is less than the control included in the first GUI. The electronic device divides the third GUI into N 2 sub-interfaces. The N 2 sub-interfaces include the second sub-interface, and N 2 is less than N 1 . The electronic device displays a second target interface in the projection area, the second target interface is superimposed and displayed on the third GUI, and the content of the second target interface is the same as that of the second sub-interface.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在电子设备在投影区域显示第二目标界面之后,该界面的显示方法还可以包括:电子设备在检测到对投影区域中的第三控件的第三触摸操作时,响应于该第三触摸操作,电子设备在触摸屏上显示第四GUI;电子设备根据第四GUI的内容判断是否要确定投影区域,如果要确定投影区域,电子设备可以确定投影区域,将第四GUI划分为N 3个子界面,该N 3个子界面包括第三子界面,并在投影区域显示第三目标界面,该第三目标界面叠加显示在第四GUI之上,该第三目标界面的内容与第三子界面的内容相同;如果不要确定投影区域,电子设备可以不对第四GUI进行划分,也就是说,正常显示该第四GUI。 In a possible implementation manner, after the electronic device displays the second target interface in the projection area, the display method of the interface may further include: when the electronic device detects a third touch operation on the third control in the projection area. In response to the third touch operation, the electronic device displays a fourth GUI on the touch screen; the electronic device determines whether to determine the projection area according to the content of the fourth GUI. If the projection area is to be determined, the electronic device may determine the projection area and change the fourth area. The GUI is divided into N 3 sub-interfaces. The N 3 sub-interfaces include a third sub-interface, and a third target interface is displayed in the projection area. The third target interface is superimposed on the fourth GUI, and the content of the third target interface is displayed. The content is the same as that of the third sub-interface; if the projection area is not determined, the electronic device may not divide the fourth GUI, that is, display the fourth GUI normally.
本实施例提供的技术方案,电子设备能够在用户单手操作电子设备时,将电子设 备触摸屏上当前显示的GUI中的其中一个子界面,投射到触摸屏上用户手指可触及的区域,即电子设备在投影区域内显示一目标界面,该目标界面叠加显示在当前显示的GUI之上,且该目标界面的内容与该子界面的内容相同,使得用户在投影区域中可以实现对触摸屏上手指无法触及的区域上显示的内容的操作。这样,降低了用户单手操作触摸屏上显示的部分内容的难度,提高了电子设备的使用效率,同时也能提高用户体验。并且,电子设备可以根据触摸屏上显示的GUI中所包括的控件的数量,采用适合该GUI特点的划分方案对该GUI进行划分或者不进行划分,使得电子设备的界面划分更加智能,同时提高了用户体验。According to the technical solution provided in this embodiment, when the user operates the electronic device with one hand, the electronic device can project one of the sub-interfaces in the GUI currently displayed on the touch screen of the electronic device onto an area accessible to the user's finger on the touch screen, that is, the electronic device A target interface is displayed in the projection area, the target interface is superimposed on the currently displayed GUI, and the content of the target interface is the same as the content of the sub-interface, so that the user can realize that the finger on the touch screen cannot be reached in the projection area. The operation of the content displayed on the area. This reduces the difficulty for the user to operate part of the content displayed on the touch screen with one hand, improves the use efficiency of the electronic device, and can also improve the user experience. In addition, according to the number of controls included in the GUI displayed on the touch screen, the electronic device can divide or not divide the GUI by using a division scheme suitable for the characteristics of the GUI, so that the interface division of the electronic device is more intelligent, and the user is improved. Experience.
第三方面,本实施例提供一种电子设备,该电子设备可以包括:显示单元,用于显示第一应用程序的第一GUI,该第一GUI包括第一子界面;输入单元,用于接收开启单手操作模式的操作;确定单元,用于响应于上述输入单元接收到的操作,确定投影区域,该投影区域为用户单手操作电子设备时手指可触及的区域;显示单元,还用于在投影区域显示第一目标界面,该第一目标界面叠加显示在上述第一GUI之上,该第一目标界面的内容与上述第一子界面的内容相同。In a third aspect, this embodiment provides an electronic device. The electronic device may include a display unit for displaying a first GUI of a first application program, the first GUI including a first sub-interface, and an input unit for receiving Turn on the operation of the one-handed operation mode; the determining unit is used to determine a projection area in response to the operation received by the input unit, and the projection area is an area that can be touched by a finger when the user operates the electronic device with one hand; A first target interface is displayed in the projection area, and the first target interface is superimposed and displayed on the first GUI, and the content of the first target interface is the same as that of the first sub-interface.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该电子设备还可以包括:划分单元,用于将上述第一GUI划分为N 1个子界面,该N 1个子界面中包括第一子界面。 In a possible implementation manner, the electronic device may further include a dividing unit configured to divide the first GUI into N 1 sub-interfaces, and the N 1 sub-interfaces include the first sub-interface.
在一种可能的实现方式中,显示单元,具体用于在投影区域显示第一目标界面包括的控件。In a possible implementation manner, the display unit is specifically configured to display controls included in the first target interface in a projection area.
在一种可能的实现方式中,输入单元,还用于接收针对投影区域中的第一控件的触摸操作;显示单元,还用于响应于输入单元接收到的触摸操作,显示第一应用程序的第二GUI,第二GUI中包括的控件数量小于预定阈值,在投影区域显示至少一个控件,该至少一个控件叠加显示在该第二GUI之上,该至少一个控件与第二GUI包括的控件一一相同。In a possible implementation manner, the input unit is further configured to receive a touch operation for the first control in the projection area; the display unit is further configured to display the first application program's response in response to the touch operation received by the input unit. The second GUI. The number of controls included in the second GUI is less than a predetermined threshold, and at least one control is displayed in the projection area. The at least one control is superimposed on the second GUI, and the at least one control and the control included in the second GUI are One is the same.
在一种可能的实现方式中,输入单元,还用于接收针对投影区域中的第二控件的触摸操作;显示单元,还用于响应于输入单元接收到的触摸操作,显示第二应用程序的第三GUI,第三GUI中包括的控件少于第一GUI中包括的控件;划分单元,还用于将第三GUI划分为N 2个子界面,该N 2个子界面包括第二子界面,N 2小于N 1;显示单元,还用于在投影区域显示第二目标界面,该第二目标界面叠加显示在第三GUI之上,该第二目标界面的内容与第二子界面的内容相同。 In a possible implementation manner, the input unit is further configured to receive a touch operation with respect to the second control in the projection area; the display unit is further configured to display the second application program ’s response to the touch operation received by the input unit. The third GUI, the third GUI includes fewer controls than the first GUI; the dividing unit is further configured to divide the third GUI into N 2 sub-interfaces, the N 2 sub-interfaces including the second sub-interface, N 2 is less than N 1 ; the display unit is further configured to display a second target interface in the projection area, the second target interface is superimposed and displayed on the third GUI, and the content of the second target interface is the same as that of the second sub-interface.
在一种可能的实现方式中,上述第一GUI还可以包括第三子界面;输入单元,还用于接收在投影区域中的滑动操作;显示单元,还用于响应于输入单元接收到的滑动操作,在投影区域显示第三目标界面,该第三目标界面叠加显示在第一GUI之上,第三目标界面的内容与第三子界面的内容相同。In a possible implementation manner, the first GUI may further include a third sub-interface; the input unit is further configured to receive a sliding operation in the projection area; and the display unit is further configured to respond to the sliding received by the input unit In operation, a third target interface is displayed in the projection area. The third target interface is superimposed and displayed on the first GUI, and the content of the third target interface is the same as that of the third sub-interface.
在一种可能的实现方式中,投影区域与N 1个子界面中的一个子界面所在的区域重合;或第一目标界面的尺寸大于第一子界面的尺寸;或第一子界面的显示效果与第一GUI中其他子界面的显示效果不同;或第一目标界面的显示效果与第一子界面的显示效果相同,且第一目标界面的显示效果与第一GUI中其他子界面的显示效果不同;或第一目标界面的尺寸与第一子界面的尺寸相同,且第一子界面的尺寸与第一GUI中的其他子界面的尺寸不同;或在将第一GUI划分为N 1个子界面后,子界面的轮廓线叠 加显示在第一GUI之上;或第一子界面所在的区域的操作频率高于第一GUI中其他子界面所在的区域的操作频率;或第一子界面包括的控件多于第一GUI中其他任一子界面包括的控件;或叠加显示是指第一目标界面悬浮显示在第一GUI之上;或叠加显示是指第一目标界面显示在第一GUI之上,且第一GUI做高斯模糊处理;或N 1等于9,且N 2等于6。 In a possible implementation manner, the projection area coincides with the area where one of the N 1 sub-interfaces is located; or the size of the first target interface is larger than the size of the first sub-interface; or the display effect of the first sub-interface is the same as The display effect of other sub-interfaces in the first GUI is different; or the display effect of the first target interface is the same as that of the first sub-interface, and the display effect of the first target interface is different from the display effect of other sub-interfaces in the first GUI ; Or the size of the first target interface is the same as the size of the first sub-interface, and the size of the first sub-interface is different from that of other sub-interfaces in the first GUI; or after the first GUI is divided into N 1 sub-interfaces , The outline of the sub-interface is superimposed and displayed on the first GUI; or the operating frequency of the area where the first sub-interface is located is higher than that of the other sub-interfaces in the first GUI; or the controls included in the first sub-interface There are more controls than any other sub-interface in the first GUI; or overlay display means that the first target interface is suspended above the first GUI; or overlay display means that the first target interface is displayed on the first GUI On a GUI, the first GUI and do Gaussian blurring; 9 or equal to N 1 and N 2 is equal to 6.
第四方面,本实施例提供一种电子设备,该电子设备可以包括:一个或多个处理器、存储器、触摸屏以及一个或多个计算机程序;一个或多个处理器、存储器、触摸屏以及一个或多个计算机程序通过一个或多个通信总线连接;触摸屏包括触敏表面和显示屏,一个或多个计算机程序被存储在存储器中,并被配置为被一个或多个处理器执行;一个或多个计算机程序包括指令,该指令可以用于执行如第一方面或第一方面的可能的实现方式中任一所述的界面的显示方法。In a fourth aspect, this embodiment provides an electronic device, which may include: one or more processors, a memory, a touch screen, and one or more computer programs; one or more processors, a memory, a touch screen, and one or more Multiple computer programs are connected through one or more communication buses; the touch screen includes a touch-sensitive surface and a display screen; one or more computer programs are stored in memory and configured to be executed by one or more processors; one or more Each computer program includes instructions that can be used to execute the method for displaying an interface according to the first aspect or any possible implementation of the first aspect.
第五方面,本实施例提供一种计算机存储介质,包括计算机指令,当该计算机指令在电子设备上运行时,使得电子设备执行如第一方面或第一方面的可能的实现方式中任一所述的界面的显示方法。In a fifth aspect, this embodiment provides a computer storage medium including computer instructions that, when the computer instructions run on an electronic device, cause the electronic device to execute any of the first aspect or a possible implementation manner of the first aspect. The display method of the interface described above.
第六方面,本实施例提供一种计算机程序产品,当该计算机程序产品在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行如第一方面或第一方面的可能的实现方式中任一所述的界面的显示方法。According to a sixth aspect, this embodiment provides a computer program product that, when the computer program product runs on a computer, causes the computer to perform display of an interface as described in the first aspect or any possible implementation manner of the first aspect. method.
应当理解的是,本实施例中对技术特征、技术方案、有益效果或类似语言的描述并不是暗示在任意的单个实施例中可以实现所有的特点和优点。相反,可以理解的是对于特征或有益效果的描述意味着在至少一个实施例中包括特定的技术特征、技术方案或有益效果。因此,本说明书中对于技术特征、技术方案或有益效果的描述并不一定是指相同的实施例。进而,还可以任何适当的方式组合本实施例中所描述的技术特征、技术方案和有益效果。本领域技术人员将会理解,无需特定实施例的一个或多个特定的技术特征、技术方案或有益效果即可实现实施例。在其他实施例中,还可在没有体现所有实施例的特定实施例中识别出额外的技术特征和有益效果。It should be understood that the description of the technical features, technical solutions, beneficial effects, or similar language in this embodiment does not imply that all features and advantages can be realized in any single embodiment. On the contrary, it can be understood that the description of the features or beneficial effects means that specific technical features, technical solutions or beneficial effects are included in at least one embodiment. Therefore, the description of technical features, technical solutions or beneficial effects in this specification does not necessarily refer to the same embodiment. Furthermore, the technical features, technical solutions, and beneficial effects described in this embodiment can also be combined in any suitable manner. Those skilled in the art will understand that the embodiments can be implemented without one or more specific technical features, technical solutions, or beneficial effects of the specific embodiments. In other embodiments, additional technical features and beneficial effects may also be identified in specific embodiments that do not reflect all embodiments.
附图说明BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
图1为一些实施例中手机上显示的一些图形用户界面的示意图;FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of some graphical user interfaces displayed on a mobile phone in some embodiments; FIG.
图2A-2B为其他一些实施例中手机上显示的一些图形用户界面的示意图;2A-2B are schematic diagrams of some graphical user interfaces displayed on a mobile phone in other embodiments;
图3为本实施例提供的一种电子设备300的结构示意图;FIG. 3 is a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device 300 according to this embodiment;
图4为本实施例提供的一种电子设备300的软件结构框图;FIG. 4 is a software structural block diagram of an electronic device 300 according to this embodiment;
图5A-5B为本实施例中电子设备上显示的一些图形用户界面的示意图;5A-5B are schematic diagrams of some graphical user interfaces displayed on the electronic device in this embodiment;
图6为本实施例中电子设备上显示的其他一些图形用户界面的示意图;6 is a schematic diagram of some other graphical user interfaces displayed on the electronic device in this embodiment;
图7A-7E为本实施例中电子设备上显示的另外一些图形用户界面的示意图;7A-7E are schematic diagrams of other graphical user interfaces displayed on the electronic device in this embodiment;
图8A-8B为本实施例中电子设备上显示的另外一些图形用户界面的示意图;8A-8B are schematic diagrams of other graphical user interfaces displayed on the electronic device in this embodiment;
图9A-9D为本实施例中电子设备上显示的另外一些图形用户界面的示意图;9A-9D are schematic diagrams of other graphical user interfaces displayed on the electronic device in this embodiment;
图10A-10B为本实施例中电子设备上显示的另外一些图形用户界面的示意图;10A-10B are schematic diagrams of other graphical user interfaces displayed on the electronic device in this embodiment;
图11A-11B为本实施例中电子设备上显示的另外一些图形用户界面的示意图;11A-11B are schematic diagrams of other graphical user interfaces displayed on the electronic device in this embodiment;
图12A-12B为本实施例中电子设备上显示的另外一些图形用户界面的示意图;12A-12B are schematic diagrams of other graphical user interfaces displayed on the electronic device in this embodiment;
图13为本实施例中电子设备上显示的另外一些图形用户界面的示意图;13 is a schematic diagram of another graphical user interface displayed on the electronic device in this embodiment;
图14A-14B为本实施例中电子设备上显示的另外一些图形用户界面的示意图;14A-14B are schematic diagrams of other graphical user interfaces displayed on the electronic device in this embodiment;
图15为本实施例中电子设备上显示的另外一些图形用户界面的示意图;15 is a schematic diagram of another graphical user interface displayed on the electronic device in this embodiment;
图16A-16C为本实施例中电子设备上显示的另外一些图形用户界面的示意图;16A-16C are schematic diagrams of other graphical user interfaces displayed on the electronic device in this embodiment;
图17为本实施例提供的一种界面的显示方法的流程示意图;17 is a schematic flowchart of a method for displaying an interface according to this embodiment;
图18为本实施例提供的另一种界面的显示方法的流程示意图;18 is a schematic flowchart of another interface display method according to this embodiment;
图19为本实施例提供的又一种界面的显示方法的流程示意图;19 is a schematic flowchart of another interface display method according to this embodiment;
图20为本实施例提供的又一种界面的显示方法的流程示意图;20 is a schematic flowchart of another interface display method according to this embodiment;
图21为本实施例提供的又一种界面的显示方法的流程示意图;21 is a schematic flowchart of another interface display method according to this embodiment;
图22为本实施例提供的又一种界面的显示方法的流程示意图;22 is a schematic flowchart of another interface display method according to this embodiment;
图23为本实施例提供中电子设备上显示的另外一些图形用户界面的示意图;FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram of another graphical user interface displayed on the electronic device in this embodiment; FIG.
图24为本实施例提供的一种电子设备的结构示意图;FIG. 24 is a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device according to this embodiment; FIG.
图25为本实施例提供的另一种电子设备的结构示意图;25 is a schematic structural diagram of another electronic device according to this embodiment;
图26为本实施例提供的又一种电子设备的结构示意图。FIG. 26 is a schematic structural diagram of still another electronic device according to this embodiment.
具体实施方式detailed description
应当理解,尽管在以下实施例中可能采用术语第一、第二等来描述用户在触摸屏上输入的操作,但用户在触摸屏上输入的操作不应限于这些术语。这些术语仅用来将用户在触摸屏上输入的操作彼此区分开。例如,在不脱离这些实施例范围的情况下,第一操作也可以被称为第二操作,类似地,第二操作也可以被称为第一操作。同理,以下实施例中可能采用术语第一、第二等来描述在触摸屏上显示的图形用户界面(graphical user interface,GUI),但在触摸屏上显示的GUI不限于这些术语,这些术语仅用来将在触摸屏上显示的GUI彼此分开。It should be understood that although the terms first, second, etc. may be used in the following embodiments to describe the operations entered by the user on the touch screen, the operations entered by the user on the touch screen should not be limited to these terms. These terms are only used to distinguish the actions entered by the user on the touch screen from each other. For example, without departing from the scope of these embodiments, the first operation may also be referred to as the second operation, and similarly, the second operation may also be referred to as the first operation. Similarly, in the following embodiments, the terms first, second, etc. may be used to describe the graphical user interface (GUI) displayed on the touch screen, but the GUI displayed on the touch screen is not limited to these terms. These terms are used only To separate the GUIs displayed on the touch screen from each other.
本实施例提供一种界面的显示方法,该方法可以在具有触摸屏的电子设备中实现。在一些实施例提供的方法中,用户在单手握持电子设备时,通过将电子设备触摸屏上当前显示的GUI划分为多个子界面,并将这多个子界面中用户欲操作的子界面投射到触摸屏上用户手指可触及的区域内,即在当前显示的GUI之上叠加显示与用户欲操作的子界面的内容相同的目标界面,以便用户可以在该可触及的区域内实现对手指无法触及区域内的内容的操作。在其他一些实施例提供的方法中,用户在单手握持电子设备时,通过将电子设备触摸屏上当前显示的GUI划分为多个子界面,并将这多个子界面中用户欲操作的子界面包括的控件投射到触摸屏上用户手指可触及的区域内,即在当前显示的GUI之上叠加显示与用户欲操作的子界面的内容相同的目标界面包括的控件,以便用户可以在该可触及的区域内实现对手指无法触及区域内的内容的操作。这样,在用户单手握持电子设备时,可以在不影响用户视觉体验和操作体验的同时,使得用户可以便捷的对触摸屏中手指无法触及的区域上显示的内容进行操作,实现了电子设备与用户之间的高效互动。This embodiment provides a method for displaying an interface, which can be implemented in an electronic device with a touch screen. In the method provided by some embodiments, when the user holds the electronic device with one hand, the user currently divides the GUI currently displayed on the touch screen of the electronic device into a plurality of sub-interfaces, and projects the sub-interfaces that the user wants to operate in the multiple sub-interfaces to In the area reachable by the user's finger on the touch screen, that is, the target interface that is the same as the content of the sub-interface that the user wants to operate is superimposed on the currently displayed GUI, so that the user can realize the area that cannot be reached by the finger within the accessible area Actions within the content. In the methods provided by some other embodiments, when the user holds the electronic device with one hand, the user currently divides the GUI currently displayed on the touch screen of the electronic device into multiple sub-interfaces, and the sub-interfaces that the user wants to operate among the multiple sub-interfaces include Controls are projected into the area accessible by the user ’s finger on the touch screen, that is, the controls included in the target interface with the same content of the sub-interface that the user wants to operate are superimposed on the currently displayed GUI, so that the user can The operation of the content in the area that can not be reached by a finger can be realized within. In this way, when the user holds the electronic device with one hand, the user can conveniently operate the content displayed on the area inaccessible by the finger in the touch screen without affecting the user's visual experience and operation experience. Efficient interaction between users.
其中,上述控件是一种GUI元素,它是一种软件组件,包含在应用程序中,控制着该应用程序处理的所有数据以及关于这些数据的交互操作,用户可以通过直接操作(direct manipulation)来与控件交互,从而对应用程序的有关信息进行读取或者编辑。一般而言,控件可以包括图标、按钮、菜单、选项卡、文本框、对话框、状态栏、导航栏、Widget等可视的界面元素。Among them, the above control is a kind of GUI element, which is a software component contained in the application and controls all the data processed by the application and the interactive operation of these data. The user can perform direct manipulation (direct manipulation) to Interact with controls to read or edit information about the application. Generally speaking, controls can include visual interface elements such as icons, buttons, menus, tabs, text boxes, dialog boxes, status bars, navigation bars, and widgets.
以下介绍电子设备、用于这样的电子设备的GUI、和用于使用这样的电子设备的实施例。在一些实施例中,电子设备可以是还包含其它功能诸如个人数字助理和/或音乐播放器功能的便携式电子设备,诸如手机、平板电脑、具备无线通讯功能的可穿戴设备(如智能手表)等。便携式电子设备的示例性实施例包括但不限于搭载
Figure PCTCN2018101382-appb-000001
Figure PCTCN2018101382-appb-000002
或者其它操作系统的便携式电子设备。上述便携式电子设备也可以是其它便携式电子设备,诸如具有触敏表面(例如触控面板)的膝上型计算机(Laptop)等。还应当理解的是,在其他一些实施例中,上述电子设备也可以不是便携式电子设备,而是具有触敏表面(例如触控面板)的台式计算机。
The following describes an electronic device, a GUI for such an electronic device, and embodiments for using such an electronic device. In some embodiments, the electronic device may be a portable electronic device that further includes other functions such as a personal digital assistant and / or music player function, such as a mobile phone, a tablet, a wearable device with a wireless communication function (such as a smart watch), etc. . Exemplary embodiments of portable electronic devices include, but are not limited to, carrying
Figure PCTCN2018101382-appb-000001
Figure PCTCN2018101382-appb-000002
Or portable electronic devices with other operating systems. The aforementioned portable electronic device may also be other portable electronic devices, such as a laptop computer having a touch-sensitive surface (for example, a touch panel). It should also be understood that, in some other embodiments, the aforementioned electronic device may not be a portable electronic device, but a desktop computer with a touch-sensitive surface (such as a touch panel).
图3示出了电子设备300的结构示意图。FIG. 3 is a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device 300.
电子设备300可以包括处理器310,外部存储器接口320,内部存储器321,通用串行总线(universal serial bus,USB)接口330,充电管理模块340,电源管理模块341,电池342,天线1,天线2,移动通信模块350,无线通信模块360,音频模块370,扬声器370A,受话器370B,麦克风370C,耳机接口370D,传感器模块380,按键390,马达391,指示器392,摄像头393,显示屏394,以及用户标识模块(subscriber identification module,SIM)卡接口395等。其中传感器模块380可以包括压力传感器380A,陀螺仪传感器380B,气压传感器380C,磁传感器380D,加速度传感器380E,距离传感器380F,接近光传感器380G,指纹传感器380H,温度传感器380J,触摸传感器380K,环境光传感器380L,骨传导传感器380M等。The electronic device 300 may include a processor 310, an external memory interface 320, an internal memory 321, a universal serial bus (USB) interface 330, a charge management module 340, a power management module 341, a battery 342, an antenna 1, and an antenna 2 , Mobile communication module 350, wireless communication module 360, audio module 370, speaker 370A, receiver 370B, microphone 370C, headphone interface 370D, sensor module 380, button 390, motor 391, indicator 392, camera 393, display 394, and display 394, and Subscriber identification module (SIM) card interface 395 and the like. The sensor module 380 may include a pressure sensor 380A, a gyroscope sensor 380B, an air pressure sensor 380C, a magnetic sensor 380D, an acceleration sensor 380E, a distance sensor 380F, a proximity light sensor 380G, a fingerprint sensor 380H, a temperature sensor 380J, a touch sensor 380K, and ambient light. Sensor 380L, bone conduction sensor 380M, etc.
可以理解的是,本实施例示意的结构并不构成对电子设备300的具体限定。在另一些实施例中,电子设备300可以包括比图示更多或更少的部件,或者组合某些部件,或者拆分某些部件,或者不同的部件布置。图示的部件可以以硬件,软件或软件和硬件的组合实现。It can be understood that the structure illustrated in this embodiment does not constitute a specific limitation on the electronic device 300. In other embodiments, the electronic device 300 may include more or fewer components than shown, or combine certain components, or split certain components, or different component arrangements. The illustrated components can be implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of software and hardware.
处理器310可以包括一个或多个处理单元,例如:处理器310可以包括应用处理器(application processor,AP),调制解调处理器,图形处理器(graphics processing unit,GPU),图像信号处理器(image signal processor,ISP),控制器,存储器,视频编解码器,数字信号处理器(digital signal processor,DSP),基带处理器,和/或神经网络处理器(neural-network processing unit,NPU)等。其中,不同的处理单元可以是独立的器件,也可以集成在一个或多个处理器中。The processor 310 may include one or more processing units. For example, the processor 310 may include an application processor (AP), a modem processor, a graphics processing unit (GPU), and an image signal processor. (image, signal processor, ISP), controller, memory, video codec, digital signal processor (DSP), baseband processor, and / or neural-network processing unit (NPU) Wait. Among them, different processing units may be independent devices or integrated in one or more processors.
其中,控制器可以是电子设备300的神经中枢和指挥中心。控制器可以根据指令操作码和时序信号,产生操作控制信号,完成取指令和执行指令的控制。The controller may be a nerve center and a command center of the electronic device 300. The controller can generate operation control signals according to the instruction operation code and timing signals, and complete the control of fetching and executing instructions.
处理器310中还可以设置存储器,用于存储指令和数据。在一些实施例中,处理器310中的存储器为高速缓冲存储器。该存储器可以保存处理器310刚用过或循环使用的指令或数据。如果处理器310需要再次使用该指令或数据,可从所述存储器中直接调用。避免了重复存取,减少了处理器310的等待时间,因而提高了系统的效率。The processor 310 may further include a memory for storing instructions and data. In some embodiments, the memory in the processor 310 is a cache memory. The memory may store instructions or data that the processor 310 has just used or cyclically used. If the processor 310 needs to use the instruction or data again, it can be directly called from the memory. Repeated accesses are avoided and the waiting time of the processor 310 is reduced, thereby improving the efficiency of the system.
在一些实施例中,处理器310可以包括一个或多个接口。接口可以包括集成电路(inter-integrated circuit,I2C)接口,集成电路内置音频(inter-integrated circuit sound,I2S)接口,脉冲编码调制(pulse code modulation,PCM)接口,通用异步收发传输器(universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter,UART)接口,移动产业处理器接口(mobile industry processor interface,MIPI),通用输入输出(general-purpose input/output,GPIO)接口, 用户标识模块(subscriber identity module,SIM)接口,和/或通用串行总线(universal serial bus,USB)接口等。In some embodiments, the processor 310 may include one or more interfaces. The interface may include an integrated circuit (inter-integrated circuit, I2C) interface, an integrated circuit (inter-integrated circuit, sound, I2S) interface, a pulse code modulation (pulse code modulation, PCM) interface, a universal asynchronous transceiver (universal asynchronous) receiver / transmitter (UART) interface, mobile industry processor interface (MIPI), general-purpose input / output (GPIO) interface, subscriber identity module (SIM) interface, and / Or universal serial bus (universal serial bus, USB) interface.
I2C接口是一种双向同步串行总线,包括一根串行数据线(serial data line,SDA)和一根串行时钟线(derail clock line,SCL)。在一些实施例中,处理器310可以包含多组I2C总线。处理器310可以通过不同的I2C总线接口分别耦合触摸传感器380K,充电器,闪光灯,摄像头393等。例如:处理器310可以通过I2C接口耦合触摸传感器380K,使处理器310与触摸传感器380K通过I2C总线接口通信,实现电子设备300的触摸功能。The I2C interface is a two-way synchronous serial bus, including a serial data line (SDA) and a serial clock line (SCL). In some embodiments, the processor 310 may include multiple sets of I2C buses. The processor 310 may be respectively coupled to a touch sensor 380K, a charger, a flash, a camera 393, and the like through different I2C bus interfaces. For example, the processor 310 may be coupled to the touch sensor 380K through the I2C interface, so that the processor 310 and the touch sensor 380K communicate through the I2C bus interface to implement the touch function of the electronic device 300.
I2S接口可以用于音频通信。在一些实施例中,处理器310可以包含多组I2S总线。处理器310可以通过I2S总线与音频模块370耦合,实现处理器310与音频模块370之间的通信。在一些实施例中,音频模块370可以通过I2S接口向无线通信模块360传递音频信号,实现通过蓝牙耳机接听电话的功能。The I2S interface can be used for audio communication. In some embodiments, the processor 310 may include multiple sets of I2S buses. The processor 310 may be coupled to the audio module 370 through an I2S bus to implement communication between the processor 310 and the audio module 370. In some embodiments, the audio module 370 may transmit an audio signal to the wireless communication module 360 through an I2S interface to implement a function of receiving a call through a Bluetooth headset.
PCM接口也可以用于音频通信,将模拟信号抽样,量化和编码。在一些实施例中,音频模块370与无线通信模块360可以通过PCM总线接口耦合。在一些实施例中,音频模块370也可以通过PCM接口向无线通信模块360传递音频信号,实现通过蓝牙耳机接听电话的功能。所述I2S接口和所述PCM接口都可以用于音频通信。The PCM interface can also be used for audio communications, sampling, quantizing, and encoding analog signals. In some embodiments, the audio module 370 and the wireless communication module 360 may be coupled through a PCM bus interface. In some embodiments, the audio module 370 may also transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 360 through the PCM interface, so as to implement the function of receiving calls through a Bluetooth headset. Both the I2S interface and the PCM interface can be used for audio communication.
UART接口是一种通用串行数据总线,用于异步通信。该总线可以为双向通信总线。它将要传输的数据在串行通信与并行通信之间转换。在一些实施例中,UART接口通常被用于连接处理器310与无线通信模块360。例如:处理器310通过UART接口与无线通信模块360中的蓝牙模块通信,实现蓝牙功能。在一些实施例中,音频模块370可以通过UART接口向无线通信模块360传递音频信号,实现通过蓝牙耳机播放音乐的功能。The UART interface is a universal serial data bus for asynchronous communication. The bus may be a two-way communication bus. It converts the data to be transferred between serial and parallel communications. In some embodiments, a UART interface is typically used to connect the processor 310 and the wireless communication module 360. For example, the processor 310 communicates with a Bluetooth module in the wireless communication module 360 through a UART interface to implement a Bluetooth function. In some embodiments, the audio module 370 may transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 360 through a UART interface, so as to implement a function of playing music through a Bluetooth headset.
MIPI接口可以被用于连接处理器310与显示屏394,摄像头393等外围器件。MIPI接口包括摄像头串行接口(camera serial interface,CSI),显示屏串行接口(display serial interface,DSI)等。在一些实施例中,处理器310和摄像头393通过CSI接口通信,实现电子设备300的拍摄功能。处理器310和显示屏394通过DSI接口通信,实现电子设备300的显示功能。The MIPI interface can be used to connect the processor 310 with peripheral devices such as the display 394 and the camera 393. The MIPI interface includes a camera serial interface (CSI), a display serial interface (DSI), and the like. In some embodiments, the processor 310 and the camera 393 communicate through a CSI interface to implement a shooting function of the electronic device 300. The processor 310 and the display screen 394 communicate through a DSI interface to implement a display function of the electronic device 300.
GPIO接口可以通过软件配置。GPIO接口可以被配置为控制信号,也可被配置为数据信号。在一些实施例中,GPIO接口可以用于连接处理器310与摄像头393,显示屏394,无线通信模块360,音频模块370,传感器模块380等。GPIO接口还可以被配置为I2C接口,I2S接口,UART接口,MIPI接口等。The GPIO interface can be configured by software. The GPIO interface can be configured as a control signal or as a data signal. In some embodiments, the GPIO interface may be used to connect the processor 310 with the camera 393, the display 394, the wireless communication module 360, the audio module 370, the sensor module 380, and the like. GPIO interface can also be configured as I2C interface, I2S interface, UART interface, MIPI interface, etc.
USB接口330是符合USB标准规范的接口,具体可以是Mini USB接口,Micro USB接口,USB Type C接口等。USB接口330可以用于连接充电器为电子设备300充电,也可以用于电子设备300与外围设备之间传输数据。也可以用于连接耳机,通过耳机播放音频。该接口还可以用于连接其他电子设备,例如AR设备等。The USB interface 330 is an interface that complies with the USB standard specification, and specifically may be a Mini USB interface, a Micro USB interface, a USB Type C interface, and the like. The USB interface 330 can be used to connect a charger to charge the electronic device 300, and can also be used to transfer data between the electronic device 300 and a peripheral device. It can also be used to connect headphones and play audio through headphones. This interface can also be used to connect other electronic devices, such as AR devices.
可以理解的是,本实施例示意的各模块间的接口连接关系,只是示意性说明,并不构成对电子设备300的结构限定。在另一些实施例中,电子设备300也可以采用上述实施例中不同的接口连接方式,或多种接口连接方式的组合。It can be understood that the interface connection relationship between the modules shown in this embodiment is only a schematic description, and does not constitute a limitation on the structure of the electronic device 300. In other embodiments, the electronic device 300 may also adopt different interface connection modes or a combination of multiple interface connection modes in the above embodiments.
充电管理模块340用于从充电器接收充电输入。其中,充电器可以是无线充电器, 也可以是有线充电器。在一些有线充电的实施例中,充电管理模块340可以通过USB接口330接收有线充电器的充电输入。在一些无线充电的实施例中,充电管理模块340可以通过电子设备300的无线充电线圈接收无线充电输入。充电管理模块340为电池342充电的同时,还可以通过电源管理模块341为电子设备供电。The charging management module 340 is configured to receive a charging input from a charger. The charger may be a wireless charger or a wired charger. In some wired charging embodiments, the charging management module 340 may receive the charging input of the wired charger through the USB interface 330. In some wireless charging embodiments, the charging management module 340 may receive a wireless charging input through a wireless charging coil of the electronic device 300. While the charge management module 340 is charging the battery 342, the power management module 341 can also provide power to the electronic device.
电源管理模块341用于连接电池342,充电管理模块340与处理器310。电源管理模块341接收电池342和/或充电管理模块340的输入,为处理器310,内部存储器321,外部存储器,显示屏394,摄像头393,和无线通信模块360等供电。电源管理模块341还可以用于监测电池容量,电池循环次数,电池健康状态(漏电,阻抗)等参数。在其他一些实施例中,电源管理模块341也可以设置于处理器310中。在另一些实施例中,电源管理模块341和充电管理模块340也可以设置于同一个器件中。The power management module 341 is used to connect the battery 342, the charge management module 340, and the processor 310. The power management module 341 receives inputs from the battery 342 and / or the charge management module 340, and supplies power to the processor 310, the internal memory 321, the external memory, the display screen 394, the camera 393, and the wireless communication module 360. The power management module 341 can also be used to monitor parameters such as battery capacity, battery cycle times, battery health status (leakage, impedance), and so on. In other embodiments, the power management module 341 may also be disposed in the processor 310. In other embodiments, the power management module 341 and the charge management module 340 may be provided in the same device.
电子设备300的无线通信功能可以通过天线1,天线2,移动通信模块350,无线通信模块360,调制解调处理器以及基带处理器等实现。The wireless communication function of the electronic device 300 may be implemented by the antenna 1, the antenna 2, the mobile communication module 350, the wireless communication module 360, a modem processor, and a baseband processor.
天线1和天线2用于发射和接收电磁波信号。电子设备300中的每个天线可用于覆盖单个或多个通信频带。不同的天线还可以复用,以提高天线的利用率。例如:可以将天线1复用为无线局域网的分集天线。在另外一些实施例中,天线可以和调谐开关结合使用。The antenna 1 and the antenna 2 are used for transmitting and receiving electromagnetic wave signals. Each antenna in the electronic device 300 may be used to cover a single or multiple communication frequency bands. Different antennas can also be multiplexed to improve antenna utilization. For example, antenna 1 can be multiplexed into a diversity antenna for a wireless local area network. In other embodiments, the antenna may be used in conjunction with a tuning switch.
移动通信模块350可以提供应用在电子设备300上的包括2G/3G/4G/5G等无线通信的解决方案。移动通信模块350可以包括至少一个滤波器,开关,功率放大器,低噪声放大器(low noise amplifier,LNA)等。移动通信模块350可以由天线1接收电磁波,并对接收的电磁波进行滤波,放大等处理,传送至调制解调处理器进行解调。移动通信模块350还可以对经调制解调处理器调制后的信号放大,经天线1转为电磁波辐射出去。在一些实施例中,移动通信模块350的至少部分功能模块可以被设置于处理器310中。在一些实施例中,移动通信模块350的至少部分功能模块可以与处理器310的至少部分模块被设置在同一个器件中。The mobile communication module 350 may provide a wireless communication solution including 2G / 3G / 4G / 5G and the like applied to the electronic device 300. The mobile communication module 350 may include at least one filter, a switch, a power amplifier, a low noise amplifier (LNA), and the like. The mobile communication module 350 may receive the electromagnetic wave by the antenna 1, and perform filtering, amplification, and other processing on the received electromagnetic wave, and transmit it to the modem processor for demodulation. The mobile communication module 350 can also amplify the signal modulated by the modem processor and turn it into electromagnetic wave radiation through the antenna 1. In some embodiments, at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 350 may be provided in the processor 310. In some embodiments, at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 350 may be provided in the same device as at least part of the modules of the processor 310.
调制解调处理器可以包括调制器和解调器。其中,调制器用于将待发送的低频基带信号调制成中高频信号。解调器用于将接收的电磁波信号解调为低频基带信号。随后解调器将解调得到的低频基带信号传送至基带处理器处理。低频基带信号经基带处理器处理后,被传递给应用处理器。应用处理器通过音频设备(不限于扬声器370A,受话器370B等)输出声音信号,或通过显示屏394显示图像或视频。在一些实施例中,调制解调处理器可以是独立的器件。在另一些实施例中,调制解调处理器可以独立于处理器310,与移动通信模块350或其他功能模块设置在同一个器件中。The modem processor may include a modulator and a demodulator. The modulator is configured to modulate a low-frequency baseband signal to be transmitted into a high-frequency signal. The demodulator is used to demodulate the received electromagnetic wave signal into a low-frequency baseband signal. The demodulator then transmits the demodulated low-frequency baseband signal to the baseband processor for processing. The low-frequency baseband signal is processed by the baseband processor and then passed to the application processor. The application processor outputs a sound signal through an audio device (not limited to a speaker 370A, a receiver 370B, etc.), or displays an image or video through a display screen 394. In some embodiments, the modem processor may be a separate device. In other embodiments, the modem processor may be independent of the processor 310 and provided in the same device as the mobile communication module 350 or other functional modules.
无线通信模块360可以提供应用在电子设备300上的包括无线局域网(wireless local area networks,WLAN)(如无线保真(wireless fidelity,Wi-Fi)网络),蓝牙(bluetooth,BT),全球导航卫星系统(global navigation satellite system,GNSS),调频(frequency modulation,FM),近距离无线通信技术(near field communication,NFC),红外技术(infrared,IR)等无线通信的解决方案。无线通信模块360可以是集成至少一个通信处理模块的一个或多个器件。无线通信模块360经由天线2接收电磁波,将电磁波信号调频以及滤波处理,将处理后的信号发送到处理器310。无线通信模块360还可以从处理器310接收待发送的信号,对其进行调频,放大,经天线2转为电磁波辐射出去。The wireless communication module 360 can provide wireless local area networks (WLAN) (such as wireless fidelity (Wi-Fi) networks), Bluetooth (bluetooth, BT), and global navigation satellites applied to the electronic device 300. Wireless communication solutions such as global navigation system, GNSS, frequency modulation (FM), near field communication (NFC), and infrared technology (infrared, IR). The wireless communication module 360 may be one or more devices that integrate at least one communication processing module. The wireless communication module 360 receives electromagnetic waves via the antenna 2, frequency-modulates and filters the electromagnetic wave signals, and sends the processed signals to the processor 310. The wireless communication module 360 may also receive a signal to be transmitted from the processor 310, frequency-modulate it, amplify it, and turn it into electromagnetic wave radiation through the antenna 2.
在一些实施例中,电子设备300的天线1和移动通信模块350耦合,天线2和无线通信模块360耦合,使得电子设备300可以通过无线通信技术与网络以及其他设备通信。所述无线通信技术可以包括全球移动通讯系统(global system for mobile communications,GSM),通用分组无线服务(general packet radio service,GPRS),码分多址接入(code division multiple access,CDMA),宽带码分多址(wideband code division multiple access,WCDMA),时分码分多址(time-division code division multiple access,TD-SCDMA),长期演进(long term evolution,LTE),BT,GNSS,WLAN,NFC,FM,和/或IR技术等。所述GNSS可以包括全球卫星定位系统(global positioning system,GPS),全球导航卫星系统(global navigation satellite system,GLONASS),北斗卫星导航系统(beidou navigation satellite system,BDS),准天顶卫星系统(quasi-zenith satellite system,QZSS)和/或星基增强系统(satellite based augmentation systems,SBAS)。In some embodiments, the antenna 1 of the electronic device 300 is coupled to the mobile communication module 350, and the antenna 2 is coupled to the wireless communication module 360, so that the electronic device 300 can communicate with the network and other devices through wireless communication technology. The wireless communication technology may include a global mobile communication system (GSM), a general packet radio service (GPRS), a code division multiple access (CDMA), and broadband. Code division multiple access (wideband code division multiple access, WCDMA), time-division code division multiple access (TD-SCDMA), long term evolution (LTE), BT, GNSS, WLAN, NFC , FM, and / or IR technology. The GNSS may include a global positioning system (GPS), a global navigation satellite system (GLONASS), a beidou navigation navigation system (BDS), and a quasi-zenith satellite system (quasi -zenith satellite system (QZSS) and / or satellite based augmentation systems (SBAS).
电子设备300通过GPU,显示屏394,以及应用处理器等实现显示功能。GPU为图像处理的微处理器,连接显示屏394和应用处理器。GPU用于执行数学和几何计算,用于图形渲染。处理器310可包括一个或多个GPU,其执行程序指令以生成或改变显示信息。The electronic device 300 implements a display function through a GPU, a display screen 394, and an application processor. The GPU is a microprocessor for image processing and connects the display 394 and the application processor. The GPU is used to perform mathematical and geometric calculations for graphics rendering. The processor 310 may include one or more GPUs that execute program instructions to generate or change display information.
显示屏394用于显示图像,视频等。显示屏394包括显示面板。显示面板可以采用液晶显示屏(liquid crystal display,LCD),有机发光二极管(organic light-emitting diode,OLED),有源矩阵有机发光二极体或主动矩阵有机发光二极体(active-matrix organic light emitting diode的,AMOLED),柔性发光二极管(flex light-emitting diode,FLED),Miniled,MicroLed,Micro-oLed,量子点发光二极管(quantum dot light emitting diodes,QLED)等。在一些实施例中,电子设备300可以包括1个或N个显示屏394,N为大于1的正整数。The display 394 is used to display images, videos, and the like. The display screen 394 includes a display panel. The display panel can use a liquid crystal display (LCD), an organic light-emitting diode (OLED), an active matrix organic light emitting diode or an active matrix organic light emitting diode (active-matrix organic light-emitting diode). emitting diodes (AMOLED), flexible light-emitting diodes (FLEDs), Miniled, MicroLed, Micro-oLed, quantum dot light emitting diodes (QLEDs), etc. In some embodiments, the electronic device 300 may include one or N display screens 394, where N is a positive integer greater than one.
电子设备300可以通过ISP,摄像头393,视频编解码器,GPU,显示屏394以及应用处理器等实现拍摄功能。The electronic device 300 can implement a shooting function through an ISP, a camera 393, a video codec, a GPU, a display 394, and an application processor.
ISP用于处理摄像头393反馈的数据。例如,拍照时,打开快门,光线通过镜头被传递到摄像头感光元件上,光信号转换为电信号,摄像头感光元件将所述电信号传递给ISP处理,转化为肉眼可见的图像。ISP还可以对图像的噪点,亮度,肤色进行算法优化。ISP还可以对拍摄场景的曝光,色温等参数优化。在一些实施例中,ISP可以设置在摄像头393中。The ISP processes the data fed back from the camera 393. For example, when taking a picture, the shutter is opened, and the light is transmitted to the light receiving element of the camera through the lens. The light signal is converted into an electrical signal, and the light receiving element of the camera passes the electrical signal to the ISP for processing and converts the image to the naked eye. ISP can also optimize the image's noise, brightness, and skin tone. ISP can also optimize the exposure, color temperature and other parameters of the shooting scene. In some embodiments, an ISP may be provided in the camera 393.
摄像头393用于捕获静态图像或视频。物体通过镜头生成光学图像投射到感光元件。感光元件可以是电荷耦合器件(charge coupled device,CCD)或互补金属氧化物半导体(complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor,CMOS)光电晶体管。感光元件把光信号转换成电信号,之后将电信号传递给ISP转换成数字图像信号。ISP将数字图像信号输出到DSP加工处理。DSP将数字图像信号转换成标准的RGB,YUV等格式的图像信号。在一些实施例中,电子设备300可以包括1个或N个摄像头393,N为大于1的正整数。The camera 393 is used to capture still images or videos. An object generates an optical image through a lens and projects it onto a photosensitive element. The photosensitive element may be a charge coupled device (CCD) or a complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor (CMOS) phototransistor. The photosensitive element converts the optical signal into an electrical signal, and then passes the electrical signal to the ISP to convert it into a digital image signal. The ISP outputs digital image signals to the DSP for processing. DSP converts digital image signals into image signals in standard RGB, YUV and other formats. In some embodiments, the electronic device 300 may include one or N cameras 393, where N is a positive integer greater than 1.
数字信号处理器用于处理数字信号,除了可以处理数字图像信号,还可以处理其他数字信号。例如,当电子设备300在频点选择时,数字信号处理器用于对频点能量进行傅里叶变换等。A digital signal processor is used to process digital signals. In addition to digital image signals, it can also process other digital signals. For example, when the electronic device 300 selects a frequency point, the digital signal processor is used to perform a Fourier transform on the frequency point energy and the like.
视频编解码器用于对数字视频压缩或解压缩。电子设备300可以支持一种或多种视频编解码器。这样,电子设备300可以播放或录制多种编码格式的视频,例如:动态图像专家组(moving picture experts group,MPEG)1,MPEG2,MPEG3,MPEG4等。Video codecs are used to compress or decompress digital video. The electronic device 300 may support one or more video codecs. In this way, the electronic device 300 can play or record videos in multiple encoding formats, such as: moving picture expert groups (MPEG) 1, MPEG2, MPEG3, MPEG4, and so on.
NPU为神经网络(neural-network,NN)计算处理器,通过借鉴生物神经网络结构,例如借鉴人脑神经元之间传递模式,对输入信息快速处理,还可以不断的自学习。通过NPU可以实现电子设备300的智能认知等应用,例如:图像识别,人脸识别,语音识别,文本理解等。The NPU is a neural-network (NN) computing processor. By drawing on the structure of a biological neural network, such as the transfer mode between neurons in the human brain, the NPU can quickly process input information and continuously learn. Through the NPU, applications such as intelligent cognition of the electronic device 300 can be implemented, such as: image recognition, face recognition, speech recognition, text understanding, and the like.
外部存储器接口320可以用于连接外部存储卡,例如Micro SD卡,实现扩展电子设备300的存储能力。外部存储卡通过外部存储器接口320与处理器310通信,实现数据存储功能。例如将音乐,视频等文件保存在外部存储卡中。The external memory interface 320 can be used to connect an external memory card, such as a Micro SD card, to achieve the expansion of the storage capacity of the electronic device 300. The external memory card communicates with the processor 310 through the external memory interface 320 to implement a data storage function. For example, save music, videos and other files on an external memory card.
内部存储器321可以用于存储计算机可执行程序代码,所述可执行程序代码包括指令。处理器310通过运行存储在内部存储器321的指令,从而执行电子设备300的各种功能应用以及数据处理。内部存储器321可以包括存储程序区和存储数据区。其中,存储程序区可存储操作系统,至少一个功能所需的应用程序(比如声音播放功能,图像播放功能等)等。存储数据区可存储电子设备300使用过程中所创建的数据(比如音频数据,电话本等)等。此外,内部存储器321可以包括高速随机存取存储器,还可以包括非易失性存储器,例如至少一个磁盘存储器件,闪存器件,通用闪存存储器(universal flash storage,UFS)等。The internal memory 321 may be used to store computer executable program code, where the executable program code includes instructions. The processor 310 executes various functional applications and data processing of the electronic device 300 by executing instructions stored in the internal memory 321. The internal memory 321 may include a storage program area and a storage data area. The storage program area may store an operating system, at least one application required by a function (such as a sound playback function, an image playback function, etc.) and the like. The storage data area can store data (such as audio data, phone book, etc.) created during the use of the electronic device 300. In addition, the internal memory 321 may include a high-speed random access memory, and may also include a non-volatile memory, for example, at least one magnetic disk storage device, a flash memory device, a universal flash memory (UFS), and the like.
电子设备300可以通过音频模块370,扬声器370A,受话器370B,麦克风370C,耳机接口370D,以及应用处理器等实现音频功能。例如音乐播放,录音等。The electronic device 300 can implement audio functions through an audio module 370, a speaker 370A, a receiver 370B, a microphone 370C, a headphone interface 370D, and an application processor. Such as music playback, recording, etc.
音频模块370用于将数字音频信息转换成模拟音频信号输出,也用于将模拟音频输入转换为数字音频信号。音频模块370还可以用于对音频信号编码和解码。在一些实施例中,音频模块370可以设置于处理器310中,或将音频模块370的部分功能模块设置于处理器310中。The audio module 370 is used to convert digital audio information into an analog audio signal and output, and is also used to convert an analog audio input into a digital audio signal. The audio module 370 may also be used to encode and decode audio signals. In some embodiments, the audio module 370 may be disposed in the processor 310, or some functional modules of the audio module 370 may be disposed in the processor 310.
扬声器370A,也称“喇叭”,用于将音频电信号转换为声音信号。电子设备300可以通过扬声器370A收听音乐,或收听免提通话。The speaker 370A, also called a "horn", is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals. The electronic device 300 can listen to music through the speaker 370A, or listen to a hands-free call.
受话器370B,也称“听筒”,用于将音频电信号转换成声音信号。当电子设备300接听电话或语音信息时,可以通过将受话器370B靠近人耳接听语音。The receiver 370B, also known as the "earpiece", is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals. When the electronic device 300 answers a call or a voice message, it can answer the voice by holding the receiver 370B close to the human ear.
麦克风370C,也称“话筒”,“传声器”,用于将声音信号转换为电信号。当拨打电话或发送语音信息时,用户可以通过人嘴靠近麦克风370C发声,将声音信号输入到麦克风370C。电子设备300可以设置至少一个麦克风370C。在另一些实施例中,电子设备300可以设置两个麦克风370C,除了采集声音信号,还可以实现降噪功能。在另一些实施例中,电子设备300还可以设置三个,四个或更多麦克风370C,实现采集声音信号,降噪,还可以识别声音来源,实现定向录音功能等。 Microphone 370C, also called "microphone", "microphone", is used to convert sound signals into electrical signals. When making a call or sending a voice message, the user can make a sound through a person's mouth near the microphone 370C, and input a sound signal into the microphone 370C. The electronic device 300 may be provided with at least one microphone 370C. In other embodiments, the electronic device 300 may be provided with two microphones 370C, in addition to collecting sound signals, it may also implement a noise reduction function. In other embodiments, the electronic device 300 may further be provided with three, four, or more microphones 370C to realize the collection of sound signals, reduce noise, and also identify the source of the sound, and implement the directional recording function.
耳机接口370D用于连接有线耳机。耳机接口370D可以是USB接口330,也可以是3.5mm的开放移动电子设备平台(open mobile terminal platform,OMTP)标准接口,美国蜂窝电信工业协会(cellular telecommunications industry association of the USA,CTIA)标准接口。The headset interface 370D is used to connect a wired headset. The earphone interface 370D may be a USB interface 330, or a 3.5mm open mobile electronic device platform (OMTP) standard interface, a cellular telecommunications industry association (United States of America, CTIA) standard interface.
压力传感器380A用于感受压力信号,可以将压力信号转换成电信号。在一些实 施例中,压力传感器380A可以设置于显示屏394。压力传感器380A的种类很多,如电阻式压力传感器,电感式压力传感器,电容式压力传感器等。电容式压力传感器可以是包括至少两个具有导电材料的平行板。当有力作用于压力传感器380A,电极之间的电容改变。电子设备300根据电容的变化确定压力的强度。当有触摸操作作用于显示屏394,电子设备300根据压力传感器380A检测所述触摸操作强度。电子设备300也可以根据压力传感器380A的检测信号计算触摸的位置。在一些实施例中,作用于相同触摸位置,但不同触摸操作强度的触摸操作,可以对应不同的操作指令。例如:当有触摸操作强度小于第一压力阈值的触摸操作作用于短消息应用图标时,执行查看短消息的指令。当有触摸操作强度大于或等于第一压力阈值的触摸操作作用于短消息应用图标时,执行新建短消息的指令。The pressure sensor 380A is used to sense the pressure signal, and can convert the pressure signal into an electrical signal. In some embodiments, the pressure sensor 380A may be provided on the display 394. There are many types of pressure sensors 380A, such as resistive pressure sensors, inductive pressure sensors, and capacitive pressure sensors. The capacitive pressure sensor may be at least two parallel plates having a conductive material. When a force is applied to the pressure sensor 380A, the capacitance between the electrodes changes. The electronic device 300 determines the intensity of the pressure according to the change in capacitance. When a touch operation is performed on the display screen 394, the electronic device 300 detects the intensity of the touch operation according to the pressure sensor 380A. The electronic device 300 may also calculate the touched position based on the detection signal of the pressure sensor 380A. In some embodiments, touch operations acting on the same touch position but different touch operation intensities may correspond to different operation instructions. For example, when a touch operation with a touch operation intensity lower than the first pressure threshold is applied to the short message application icon, an instruction for viewing the short message is executed. When a touch operation with a touch operation intensity greater than or equal to the first pressure threshold is applied to the short message application icon, an instruction for creating a short message is executed.
陀螺仪传感器380B可以用于确定电子设备300的运动姿态。在一些实施例中,可以通过陀螺仪传感器380B确定电子设备300围绕三个轴(即,x,y和z轴)的角速度。陀螺仪传感器380B可以用于拍摄防抖。示例性的,当按下快门,陀螺仪传感器380B检测电子设备300抖动的角度,根据角度计算出镜头模组需要补偿的距离,让镜头通过反向运动抵消电子设备300的抖动,实现防抖。陀螺仪传感器380B还可以用于导航,体感游戏场景。The gyro sensor 380B may be used to determine a motion posture of the electronic device 300. In some embodiments, the angular velocity of the electronic device 300 about three axes (ie, the x, y, and z axes) may be determined by the gyro sensor 380B. The gyro sensor 380B can be used for image stabilization. Exemplarily, when the shutter is pressed, the gyro sensor 380B detects the angle of the electronic device 300 shake, and calculates the distance that the lens module needs to compensate according to the angle, so that the lens can cancel the shake of the electronic device 300 through the backward movement to achieve image stabilization. The gyro sensor 380B can also be used for navigation and somatosensory gaming scenes.
气压传感器380C用于测量气压。在一些实施例中,电子设备300通过气压传感器380C测得的气压值计算海拔高度,辅助定位和导航。The barometric pressure sensor 380C is used to measure air pressure. In some embodiments, the electronic device 300 calculates the altitude through the air pressure value measured by the air pressure sensor 380C, and assists in positioning and navigation.
磁传感器380D包括霍尔传感器。电子设备300可以利用磁传感器380D检测翻盖皮套的开合。在一些实施例中,当电子设备300是翻盖机时,电子设备300可以根据磁传感器380D检测翻盖的开合。进而根据检测到的皮套的开合状态或翻盖的开合状态,设置翻盖自动解锁等特性。The magnetic sensor 380D includes a Hall sensor. The electronic device 300 may use the magnetic sensor 380D to detect the opening and closing of the flip leather case. In some embodiments, when the electronic device 300 is a flip machine, the electronic device 300 may detect the opening and closing of the flip according to the magnetic sensor 380D. Further, according to the opened and closed state of the holster or the opened and closed state of the flip cover, characteristics such as automatic unlocking of the flip cover are set.
加速度传感器380E可检测电子设备300在各个方向上(一般为三轴)加速度的大小。当电子设备300静止时可检测出重力的大小及方向。还可以用于识别电子设备姿态,应用于横竖屏切换,计步器等应用。The acceleration sensor 380E can detect the magnitude of the acceleration of the electronic device 300 in various directions (generally three axes). The magnitude and direction of gravity can be detected when the electronic device 300 is stationary. It can also be used to recognize the posture of electronic devices, and is used in applications such as switching between horizontal and vertical screens, and pedometers.
距离传感器380F,用于测量距离。电子设备300可以通过红外或激光测量距离。在一些实施例中,拍摄场景,电子设备300可以利用距离传感器380F测距以实现快速对焦。Distance sensor 380F, used to measure distance. The electronic device 300 can measure the distance by infrared or laser. In some embodiments, when shooting a scene, the electronic device 300 may use a distance sensor 380F to measure a distance to achieve fast focusing.
接近光传感器380G可以包括例如发光二极管(LED)和光检测器,例如光电二极管。发光二极管可以是红外发光二极管。电子设备300通过发光二极管向外发射红外光。电子设备300使用光电二极管检测来自附近物体的红外反射光。当检测到充分的反射光时,可以确定电子设备300附近有物体。当检测到不充分的反射光时,电子设备300可以确定电子设备300附近没有物体。电子设备300可以利用接近光传感器380G检测用户手持电子设备300贴近耳朵通话,以便自动熄灭屏幕达到省电的目的。接近光传感器380G也可用于皮套模式,口袋模式自动解锁与锁屏。The proximity light sensor 380G may include, for example, a light emitting diode (LED) and a light detector, such as a photodiode. The light emitting diode may be an infrared light emitting diode. The electronic device 300 emits infrared light through a light emitting diode. The electronic device 300 uses a photodiode to detect infrared reflected light from a nearby object. When sufficient reflected light is detected, it can be determined that there is an object near the electronic device 300. When insufficiently reflected light is detected, the electronic device 300 may determine that there is no object near the electronic device 300. The electronic device 300 can use the proximity light sensor 380G to detect that the user is holding the electronic device 300 close to the ear to talk, so as to automatically turn off the screen to save power. The proximity light sensor 380G can also be used in holster mode, and the pocket mode automatically unlocks and locks the screen.
环境光传感器380L用于感知环境光亮度。电子设备300可以根据感知的环境光亮度自适应调节显示屏394亮度。环境光传感器380L也可用于拍照时自动调节白平衡。环境光传感器380L还可以与接近光传感器380G配合,检测电子设备300是否在口袋里,以防误触。Ambient light sensor 380L is used to sense ambient light brightness. The electronic device 300 can adaptively adjust the brightness of the display screen 394 according to the perceived ambient light brightness. Ambient light sensor 380L can also be used to automatically adjust white balance when taking pictures. The ambient light sensor 380L can also cooperate with the proximity light sensor 380G to detect whether the electronic device 300 is in a pocket to prevent accidental touch.
指纹传感器380H用于采集指纹。电子设备300可以利用采集的指纹特性实现指纹解锁,访问应用锁,指纹拍照,指纹接听来电等。The fingerprint sensor 380H is used to collect fingerprints. The electronic device 300 may use the collected fingerprint characteristics to realize fingerprint unlocking, access application lock, fingerprint photographing, fingerprint answering incoming calls, and the like.
温度传感器380J用于检测温度。在一些实施例中,电子设备300利用温度传感器380J检测的温度,执行温度处理策略。例如,当温度传感器380J上报的温度超过阈值,电子设备300执行降低位于温度传感器380J附近的处理器的性能,以便降低功耗实施热保护。在另一些实施例中,当温度低于另一阈值时,电子设备300对电池342加热,以避免低温导致电子设备300异常关机。在其他一些实施例中,当温度低于又一阈值时,电子设备300对电池342的输出电压执行升压,以避免低温导致的异常关机。The temperature sensor 380J is used to detect the temperature. In some embodiments, the electronic device 300 executes a temperature processing strategy using the temperature detected by the temperature sensor 380J. For example, when the temperature reported by the temperature sensor 380J exceeds the threshold, the electronic device 300 performs a performance reduction of a processor located near the temperature sensor 380J, so as to reduce power consumption and implement thermal protection. In other embodiments, when the temperature is lower than another threshold, the electronic device 300 heats the battery 342 to avoid the abnormal shutdown of the electronic device 300 caused by the low temperature. In other embodiments, when the temperature is lower than another threshold, the electronic device 300 performs a boost on the output voltage of the battery 342 to avoid abnormal shutdown caused by low temperature.
触摸传感器380K,也称“触控面板”。触摸传感器380K可以设置于显示屏394,由触摸传感器380K与显示屏394组成触摸屏,也称“触控屏”。触摸传感器380K用于检测作用于其上或附近的触摸操作。触摸传感器可以将检测到的触摸操作传递给应用处理器,以确定触摸事件类型。可以通过显示屏394提供与触摸操作相关的视觉输出。在另一些实施例中,触摸传感器380K也可以设置于电子设备300的表面,与显示屏394所处的位置不同。The touch sensor 380K is also called "touch panel". The touch sensor 380K may be provided on the display screen 394. The touch sensor is composed of the touch sensor 380K and the display screen 394, which is also called a "touch screen". The touch sensor 380K is used to detect a touch operation acting on or near it. The touch sensor can pass the detected touch operation to the application processor to determine the type of touch event. A visual output related to the touch operation may be provided through the display screen 394. In other embodiments, the touch sensor 380K may also be disposed on the surface of the electronic device 300, which is different from the position where the display screen 394 is located.
骨传导传感器380M可以获取振动信号。在一些实施例中,骨传导传感器380M可以获取人体声部振动骨块的振动信号。骨传导传感器380M也可以接触人体脉搏,接收血压跳动信号。在一些实施例中,骨传导传感器380M也可以设置于耳机中,结合成骨传导耳机。音频模块370可以基于所述骨传导传感器380M获取的声部振动骨块的振动信号,解析出语音信号,实现语音功能。应用处理器可以基于所述骨传导传感器380M获取的血压跳动信号解析心率信息,实现心率检测功能。The bone conduction sensor 380M can acquire vibration signals. In some embodiments, the bone conduction sensor 380M may acquire a vibration signal of a human voice oscillating bone mass. Bone conduction sensor 380M can also contact the human pulse and receive blood pressure beating signals. In some embodiments, the bone conduction sensor 380M may also be provided in the earphone and combined into a bone conduction earphone. The audio module 370 can analyze a voice signal based on the vibration signal of the oscillating bone mass obtained by the bone conduction sensor 380M to implement a voice function. The application processor may analyze the heart rate information based on the blood pressure beating signal acquired by the bone conduction sensor 380M to implement a heart rate detection function.
按键390包括开机键,音量键等。按键390可以是机械按键。也可以是触摸式按键。电子设备300可以接收按键输入,产生与电子设备300的用户设置以及功能控制有关的键信号输入。The keys 390 include a start key, a volume key, and the like. The key 390 may be a mechanical key. It can also be a touch button. The electronic device 300 can receive key input, and generate a key signal input related to user settings and function control of the electronic device 300.
马达391可以产生振动提示。马达391可以用于来电振动提示,也可以用于触摸振动反馈。例如,作用于不同应用(例如拍照,音频播放等)的触摸操作,可以对应不同的振动反馈效果。作用于显示屏394不同区域的触摸操作,马达391也可对应不同的振动反馈效果。不同的应用场景(例如:时间提醒,接收信息,闹钟,游戏等)也可以对应不同的振动反馈效果。触摸振动反馈效果还可以支持自定义。The motor 391 may generate a vibration alert. The motor 391 can be used for incoming vibration alert and touch vibration feedback. For example, the touch operation applied to different applications (such as taking pictures, playing audio, etc.) can correspond to different vibration feedback effects. Acting on touch operations in different areas of the display 394, the motor 391 can also respond to different vibration feedback effects. Different application scenarios (such as time reminders, receiving information, alarm clocks, games, etc.) can also correspond to different vibration feedback effects. Touch vibration feedback effect can also support customization.
指示器392可以是指示灯,可以用于指示充电状态,电量变化,也可以用于指示消息,未接来电,通知等。The indicator 392 can be an indicator light, which can be used to indicate the charging status, power change, and can also be used to indicate messages, missed calls, notifications, etc.
SIM卡接口395用于连接SIM卡。SIM卡可以通过插入SIM卡接口395,或从SIM卡接口395拔出,实现和电子设备300的接触和分离。电子设备300可以支持1个或N个SIM卡接口,N为大于1的正整数。SIM卡接口395可以支持Nano SIM卡,Micro SIM卡,SIM卡等。同一个SIM卡接口395可以同时插入多张卡。所述多张卡的类型可以相同,也可以不同。SIM卡接口395也可以兼容不同类型的SIM卡。SIM卡接口395也可以兼容外部存储卡。电子设备300通过SIM卡和网络交互,实现通话以及数据通信等功能。在一些实施例中,电子设备300采用eSIM,即:嵌入式SIM卡。eSIM卡可以嵌在电子设备300中,不能和电子设备300分离。The SIM card interface 395 is used to connect a SIM card. The SIM card can be contacted and separated from the electronic device 300 by inserting or removing the SIM card interface 395. The electronic device 300 may support one or N SIM card interfaces, and N is a positive integer greater than 1. SIM card interface 395 can support Nano SIM card, Micro SIM card, SIM card, etc. Multiple SIM cards can be inserted into the same SIM card interface 395 at the same time. The types of the multiple cards may be the same or different. The SIM card interface 395 can also be compatible with different types of SIM cards. The SIM card interface 395 is also compatible with external memory cards. The electronic device 300 interacts with the network through a SIM card to implement functions such as calling and data communication. In some embodiments, the electronic device 300 uses an eSIM, that is, an embedded SIM card. The eSIM card can be embedded in the electronic device 300 and cannot be separated from the electronic device 300.
电子设备300的软件系统可以采用分层架构,事件驱动架构,微核架构,微服务 架构,或云架构。本实施例以分层架构的Android系统为例,示例性说明电子设备300的软件结构。The software system of the electronic device 300 may adopt a layered architecture, event-driven architecture, micro-core architecture, micro-service architecture, or cloud architecture. This embodiment takes a layered Android system as an example to exemplify the software structure of the electronic device 300.
图4是本实施例的电子设备300的软件结构框图。FIG. 4 is a software configuration block diagram of the electronic device 300 in this embodiment.
分层架构将软件分成若干个层,每一层都有清晰的角色和分工。层与层之间通过软件接口通信。在一些实施例中,将Android系统分为四层,从上至下分别为应用程序层,应用程序框架层,安卓运行时(Android runtime)和系统库,以及内核层。The layered architecture divides the software into several layers, each of which has a clear role and division of labor. The layers communicate with each other through a software interface. In some embodiments, the Android system is divided into four layers, which are an application layer, an application framework layer, an Android runtime and a system library, and a kernel layer from top to bottom.
应用程序层可以包括一系列应用程序包。The application layer can include a series of application packages.
如图4所示,应用程序包可以包括相机,图库,日历,通话,地图,导航,WLAN,蓝牙,音乐,视频,短信息等应用程序。As shown in Figure 4, the application package can include applications such as camera, gallery, calendar, call, map, navigation, WLAN, Bluetooth, music, video, and SMS.
应用程序框架层为应用程序层的应用程序提供应用编程接口(application programming interface,API)和编程框架。应用程序框架层包括一些预先定义的函数。The application framework layer provides an application programming interface (API) and a programming framework for applications at the application layer. The application framework layer includes some predefined functions.
如图4所示,应用程序框架层可以包括窗口管理器,内容提供器,视图系统,电话管理器,资源管理器,通知管理器等。As shown in FIG. 4, the application framework layer may include a window manager, a content provider, a view system, a phone manager, a resource manager, a notification manager, and the like.
窗口管理器用于管理窗口程序。窗口管理器可以获取显示屏大小,判断是否有状态栏,锁定屏幕,截取屏幕等。The window manager is used to manage window programs. The window manager can obtain the display size, determine whether there is a status bar, lock the screen, take a screenshot, etc.
内容提供器用来存放和获取数据,并使这些数据可以被应用程序访问。所述数据可以包括视频,图像,音频,拨打和接听的电话,浏览历史和书签,电话簿等。Content providers are used to store and retrieve data and make it accessible to applications. The data may include videos, images, audio, calls made and received, browsing history and bookmarks, phone books, and so on.
视图系统包括可视控件,例如显示文字的控件,显示图片的控件等。视图系统可用于构建应用程序。显示界面可以由一个或多个视图组成的。例如,包括短信通知图标的显示界面,可以包括显示文字的视图以及显示图片的视图。The view system includes visual controls, such as controls that display text, controls that display pictures, and so on. The view system can be used to build applications. The display interface can consist of one or more views. For example, the display interface including the SMS notification icon may include a view that displays text and a view that displays pictures.
电话管理器用于提供电子设备300的通信功能。例如通话状态的管理(包括接通,挂断等)。The phone manager is used to provide a communication function of the electronic device 300. For example, management of call status (including connection, hang up, etc.).
资源管理器为应用程序提供各种资源,比如本地化字符串,图标,图片,布局文件,视频文件等等。The resource manager provides various resources for the application, such as localized strings, icons, pictures, layout files, video files, and so on.
通知管理器使应用程序可以在状态栏中显示通知信息,可以用于传达告知类型的消息,可以短暂停留后自动消失,无需用户交互。比如通知管理器被用于告知下载完成,消息提醒等。通知管理器还可以是以图表或者滚动条文本形式出现在系统顶部状态栏的通知,例如后台运行的应用程序的通知,还可以是以对话窗口形式出现在屏幕上的通知。例如在状态栏提示文本信息,发出提示音,电子设备振动,指示灯闪烁等。The notification manager enables the application to display notification information in the status bar, which can be used to convey notification-type messages that can disappear automatically after a short stay without user interaction. For example, the notification manager is used to inform download completion, message reminders, etc. The notification manager can also be a notification that appears in the status bar at the top of the system in the form of a chart or scroll bar text, such as a notification of an application running in the background, or a notification that appears on the screen in the form of a dialog window. For example, text messages are displayed in the status bar, sounds are emitted, electronic equipment vibrates, and the indicator light flashes.
Android Runtime包括核心库和虚拟机。Android runtime负责安卓系统的调度和管理。Android Runtime includes core libraries and virtual machines. Android runtime is responsible for the scheduling and management of the Android system.
核心库包含两部分:一部分是java语言需要调用的功能函数,另一部分是安卓的核心库。The core library contains two parts: one is the functional functions that the Java language needs to call, and the other is the Android core library.
应用程序层和应用程序框架层运行在虚拟机中。虚拟机将应用程序层和应用程序框架层的java文件执行为二进制文件。虚拟机用于执行对象生命周期的管理,堆栈管理,线程管理,安全和异常的管理,以及垃圾回收等功能。The application layer and the application framework layer run in a virtual machine. The virtual machine executes the java files of the application layer and the application framework layer as binary files. Virtual machines are used to perform object lifecycle management, stack management, thread management, security and exception management, and garbage collection.
系统库可以包括多个功能模块。例如:表面管理器(surface manager),媒体库(Media Libraries),三维图形处理库(例如:OpenGL ES),2D图形引擎(例如:SGL)等。The system library can include multiple functional modules. For example: surface manager (media manager), media library (Media library), three-dimensional graphics processing library (for example: OpenGL ES), 2D graphics engine (for example: SGL) and so on.
表面管理器用于对显示子系统进行管理,并且为多个应用程序提供了2D和3D图 层的融合。The Surface Manager is used to manage the display subsystem and provides a fusion of 2D and 3D graphics layers for multiple applications.
媒体库支持多种常用的音频,视频格式回放和录制,以及静态图像文件等。媒体库可以支持多种音视频编码格式,例如:MPEG4,H.264,MP3,AAC,AMR,JPG,PNG等。The media library supports a variety of commonly used audio and video formats for playback and recording, as well as still image files. The media library can support multiple audio and video encoding formats, such as: MPEG4, H.264, MP3, AAC, AMR, JPG, PNG, etc.
三维图形处理库用于实现三维图形绘图,图像渲染,合成,和图层处理等。The 3D graphics processing library is used to implement 3D graphics drawing, image rendering, compositing, and layer processing.
2D图形引擎是2D绘图的绘图引擎。The 2D graphics engine is a graphics engine for 2D graphics.
内核层是硬件和软件之间的层。内核层至少包含显示驱动,摄像头驱动,音频驱动,传感器驱动。The kernel layer is the layer between hardware and software. The kernel layer contains at least a display driver, a camera driver, an audio driver, and a sensor driver.
示例性的,以下实施例中所涉及的技术方案均可以在具有上述硬件架构和软件架构的电子设备300中实现。以下结合附图和应用场景对本实施例提供的界面的显示方法进行详细介绍。Exemplarily, the technical solutions involved in the following embodiments can be implemented in the electronic device 300 having the above-mentioned hardware architecture and software architecture. The display method of the interface provided in this embodiment is described in detail below with reference to the drawings and application scenarios.
在电子设备的日常使用中,用户大多数情况下是需要用双手在电子设备的触摸屏上进行操作的,但用户也会遇到不方便使用双手操作的场景,例如,用户乘坐公交时需要用一只手抓住扶手。这种场景下,当用户需要使用电子设备时,只能用单手(左手或右手)握持该电子设备,并用这只手在该电子设备的触摸屏上进行操作,可称之为单手操作。In the daily use of electronic devices, users need to use their two hands to operate on the touch screen of electronic devices in most cases, but users will also encounter scenarios in which it is not convenient to use two hands to operate, for example, users need to use one Hold the armrest with your hand. In this scenario, when a user needs to use an electronic device, he can only hold the electronic device with one hand (left or right hand), and use this hand to operate on the touch screen of the electronic device, which can be called one-handed operation .
在上述单手操作的场景下,在一些实施例中,电子设备可以在确定满足特定条件时,启动单手操作模式。其中,在该单手操作模式下,电子设备可以将触摸屏上当前显示的GUI(如第一应用程序的第一GUI)划分为N个子界面(N为大于或等于2的整数,如N=4、6或9等),并将该N个子界面中的其中一个子界面投射到触摸屏的投影区域中,也就是说,电子设备可以在投影区域中显示一目标界面(如第一目标界面),该第一目标界面叠加显示在第一GUI之上,且该第一目标界面的内容与N个子界面中的其中一个子界面(如第一子界面)的内容相同。或者,在该单手操作模式下,电子设备可以将触摸屏上显示的第一应用程序的第一GUI划分为N个子界面,并将该N个子界面中的其中一个子界面包括的控件投射到触摸屏的投影区域中,即在投影区域中显示第一目标界面包括的控件,该第一目标界面包括的控件叠加显示在第一GUI之上。In the above-mentioned one-handed operation scenario, in some embodiments, the electronic device may start the one-handed operation mode when it is determined that a specific condition is satisfied. Wherein, in this one-handed operation mode, the electronic device can divide the GUI currently displayed on the touch screen (such as the first GUI of the first application program) into N sub-interfaces (N is an integer greater than or equal to 2, such as N = 4 , 6 or 9 etc.), and project one of the N sub-interfaces into the projection area of the touch screen, that is, the electronic device can display a target interface (such as the first target interface) in the projection area, The first target interface is superimposed and displayed on the first GUI, and the content of the first target interface is the same as that of one of the N sub-interfaces (such as the first sub-interface). Alternatively, in the one-handed operation mode, the electronic device may divide the first GUI of the first application displayed on the touch screen into N sub-interfaces, and project controls included in one of the N sub-interfaces onto the touch screen. In the projection area, the controls included in the first target interface are displayed in the projection area, and the controls included in the first target interface are superimposed and displayed on the first GUI.
在一些实施例中,上述叠加显示可以是指第一目标界面悬浮显示在第一GUI之上。在其他一些实施例中,上述叠加显示可以是指第一目标界面显示在第一GUI之上,且第一GUI做高斯模糊处理。In some embodiments, the above-mentioned superimposed display may refer to the first target interface floatingly displayed on the first GUI. In some other embodiments, the above-mentioned superimposed display may mean that the first target interface is displayed on the first GUI, and the first GUI performs Gaussian blur processing.
在其他一些实施例中,电子设备可以在确定满足特定条件时,显示单手操作界面。该单手操作界面可以为上述单手操作模式下显示的界面。In other embodiments, the electronic device may display a one-handed operation interface when it is determined that a specific condition is satisfied. The one-handed operation interface may be an interface displayed in the one-handed operation mode described above.
其中,投影区域可以是用户在单手握持电子设备时,手指可触及的全部区域或部分区域。这样,在用户单手握持电子设备时,可以更加方便地实现对触摸屏中手指无法触及的区域上显示的内容的操作。The projection area may be an entire area or a part of an area accessible by a finger when the user holds the electronic device with one hand. In this way, when the user holds the electronic device with one hand, it is more convenient to implement the operation on the content displayed on the area inaccessible to the finger in the touch screen.
在一些实施例中,电子设备在确定满足特定条件时,启动单手操作模式,具体可以为:电子设备在确定用户单手握持电子设备时,启动单手操作模式。In some embodiments, when the electronic device determines that a specific condition is met, the one-handed operation mode is activated. Specifically, the electronic device may start the one-handed operation mode when it is determined that the user holds the electronic device with one hand.
示例性的,电子设备可以对用户握持电子设备的握持手势(握持手势可以包括单手握持和双手握持)进行检测,当确定握持手势是单手握持时,启动单手操作模式。 例如,可以在电子设备的边框上配置传感器(如接近光传感器),该传感器可以用于检测用户握持电子设备的握持手势。在用户单手握持电子设备时,上述传感器可以检测到用户握持电子设备的握持手势为单手握持。响应于上述检测,电子设备可以启动单手操作模式。Exemplarily, the electronic device may detect a holding gesture of the user holding the electronic device (the holding gesture may include one-handed holding and two-handed holding), and when it is determined that the holding gesture is one-handed holding, start one-handed Operating mode. For example, a sensor (such as a proximity light sensor) may be configured on the frame of the electronic device, and the sensor may be used to detect a holding gesture of the user holding the electronic device. When the user holds the electronic device with one hand, the above sensor can detect that the holding gesture of the user holding the electronic device is one-handed. In response to the above detection, the electronic device may initiate a one-handed operation mode.
在其他一些实施例中,电子设备在确定满足特定条件时,启动单手操作模式,具体可以包括:电子设备在确定用户在触摸屏上输入的操作为第一操作时,启动单手操作模式。In some other embodiments, when the electronic device determines that a specific condition is met, the one-handed operation mode is activated, which may specifically include: when the electronic device determines that the operation input by the user on the touch screen is the first operation, the one-handed operation mode is activated.
其中,该第一操作可以为用户在电子设备触摸屏上输入的特定操作,如该特定操作可以为具有特定滑动轨迹(如,图5A中的502所示)的滑动操作。又例如,该第一操作也可以为用户对电子设备触摸屏上显示的虚拟按钮的操作,如该第一操作可以为用户对电子设备触摸屏上显示的悬浮按钮的双击、重压或长按操作等。The first operation may be a specific operation input by the user on the touch screen of the electronic device. For example, the specific operation may be a sliding operation with a specific sliding track (eg, shown as 502 in FIG. 5A). For another example, the first operation may also be a user ’s operation of a virtual button displayed on the touch screen of the electronic device. For example, the first operation may be a user ’s double-click, heavy pressing, or long-press operation on the floating button displayed on the touch screen of the electronic device .
示例性的,电子设备在接收到用户在触摸屏上输入的操作时,可以判断用户输入的操作是否为第一操作。当电子设备确定用户输入的操作为第一操作时,电子设备启动单手操作模式。例如,如图5A所示,以第一操作为用户在电子设备触摸屏上输入的具有特定滑动轨迹的滑动操作,第一GUI为主屏幕包括的一个子屏幕501为例进行详细说明。在用户单手(如左手)握持电子设备时,用户可以使用左手拇指在电子设备触摸屏上输入具有502所示的滑动轨迹的滑动操作。电子设备在接收到该滑动操作时,可以确定该滑动操作为第一操作。响应于上述确定,电子设备可以启动单手操作模式。需要说明的是,当第一操作为具有特定滑动轨迹的滑动操作时,该特定滑动轨迹包括但不限于图5A中所示的滑动轨迹502,例如,该特定的滑动轨迹也可以是指向电子设备右下角的滑动轨迹等。当用户使用右手握持电子设备时,可以执行该具有指向电子设备右下角的滑动轨迹的滑动操作。Exemplarily, when receiving an operation input by the user on the touch screen, the electronic device may determine whether the operation input by the user is the first operation. When the electronic device determines that the operation input by the user is the first operation, the electronic device starts a one-handed operation mode. For example, as shown in FIG. 5A, a first operation is a sliding operation with a specific sliding track input by a user on a touch screen of an electronic device, and the first GUI includes a sub-screen 501 included in the main screen as an example for detailed description. When the user holds the electronic device with one hand (such as the left hand), the user can use a left-hand thumb to input a sliding operation with a sliding track shown by 502 on the electronic device touch screen. When the electronic device receives the sliding operation, it may determine that the sliding operation is the first operation. In response to the above determination, the electronic device may initiate a one-handed operation mode. It should be noted that when the first operation is a sliding operation with a specific sliding track, the specific sliding track includes but is not limited to the sliding track 502 shown in FIG. 5A. For example, the specific sliding track may also be a pointing electronic device. Sliding trajectory in the bottom right corner, etc. When the user uses the right hand to hold the electronic device, the sliding operation with a sliding track pointing to the lower right corner of the electronic device can be performed.
在另一些实施例中,电子设备可以配置有用于打开或关闭单手操作功能的开关按钮。在该开关按钮打开的情况下,电子设备在确定满足特定条件时,才可以启动单手操作模式。In other embodiments, the electronic device may be configured with a switch button for turning on or off the one-handed operation function. When the switch button is turned on, the electronic device can start the one-handed operation mode only when it is determined that certain conditions are met.
在一些实施例中,上述开关按钮可以是显示在电子设备触摸屏上虚拟的开关按钮。例如,如图6所示,在用户想要使用电子设备的单手操作功能时,可以在电子设备的设置界面601中,对单手操作功能的开关按钮602执行点击操作。在用户对该开关按钮602执行点击操作后,电子设备可以打开单手操作功能。当用户再次对开关按钮602执行点击操作后,电子设备可以关闭单手操作功能。其中,图6所示的开关按钮602的显示效果,用于指示单手操作功能未打开,用户此时可以对该开关按钮602执行点击操作,以打开该电子设备的单手操作功能。In some embodiments, the switch button may be a virtual switch button displayed on a touch screen of the electronic device. For example, as shown in FIG. 6, when the user wants to use the one-hand operation function of the electronic device, the user may perform a click operation on the switch button 602 of the one-hand operation function in the setting interface 601 of the electronic device. After the user performs a click operation on the switch button 602, the electronic device can turn on the one-handed operation function. After the user performs a click operation on the switch button 602 again, the electronic device can turn off the one-handed operation function. The display effect of the switch button 602 shown in FIG. 6 is used to indicate that the one-hand operation function is not turned on. The user can perform a click operation on the switch button 602 at this time to turn on the one-hand operation function of the electronic device.
在其他一些实施例中,上述开关按钮也可以是物理按键。该物理按键可以设置在电子设备的一个表面上(例如手机的侧面)。当用户的手指按下或拨动该物理按键后,该电子设备可以打开单手操作功能。当用户的手指再次按下或拨动该物理按键后,该电子设备可以关闭单手操作功能。In other embodiments, the switch button may be a physical button. The physical button may be disposed on a surface of the electronic device (for example, a side of a mobile phone). After the user presses or dials the physical button, the electronic device can turn on the one-handed operation function. When the user's finger presses or toggles the physical button again, the electronic device can turn off the one-handed operation function.
也就是说,如果电子设备的单手操作功能已打开,电子设备可以在确定满足特定条件时,启动单手操作模式。如果该电子设备的单手操作功能未打开,电子设备在接收到用户在电子设备触摸屏上的操作时,响应于该操作,进行常规的响应,如电子设 备在接收到用户在触摸屏上执行的指向电子设备左下角的滑动操作时,响应于该滑动操作,显示通知栏。That is, if the one-hand operation function of the electronic device is turned on, the electronic device can start the one-hand operation mode when it is determined that a certain condition is satisfied. If the one-hand operation function of the electronic device is not turned on, when the electronic device receives a user operation on the touch screen of the electronic device, in response to the operation, it performs a conventional response, such as when the electronic device receives a pointing operation performed by the user on the touch screen. In the sliding operation in the lower left corner of the electronic device, a notification bar is displayed in response to the sliding operation.
在一些实施例中,电子设备可以在确定满足特定条件时,将第一GUI划分为N个子界面,并将该N个子界面中的其中一个子界面投射到触摸屏的投影区域中,即电子设备在投影区域显示第一目标界面,该第一目标界面叠加显示在上述第一GUI之上,且该第一目标界面的内容与N个子界面中的其中一个子界面(如第一子界面)的内容相同。在其他一些实施例中,电子设备在确定满足特定条件时,可以将第一GUI划分为N个子界面,并将N个子界面中的其中一个子界面中的控件投射到触摸屏的投影区域中,即电子设备在投影区域显示第一目标界面包括的控件,该第一目标界面包括的控件叠加显示在上述第一GUI之上。这样,方便用户进行单手操作。可以理解的是,上述N个子界面可以是相同尺寸且相同形状的,或者,上述N个子界面可以是不同尺寸或者不同形状的。以下实施例对此不做任何限制。In some embodiments, when determining that a specific condition is met, the electronic device may divide the first GUI into N sub-interfaces, and project one of the N sub-interfaces into a projection area of the touch screen, that is, the electronic device is in The projection area displays a first target interface, the first target interface is superimposed and displayed on the first GUI, and the content of the first target interface and the content of one of the N sub-interfaces (such as the first sub-interface). the same. In some other embodiments, when the electronic device determines that certain conditions are met, the first GUI may be divided into N sub-interfaces, and controls in one of the N sub-interfaces are projected into a projection area of the touch screen, that is, The electronic device displays controls included in the first target interface in the projection area, and the controls included in the first target interface are superimposed and displayed on the first GUI. In this way, it is convenient for the user to perform one-handed operation. It can be understood that the N sub-interfaces may be the same size and the same shape, or the N sub-interfaces may be different sizes or different shapes. The following embodiments do not place any restrictions on this.
在一些实施例中,如果第一GUI中包括的控件较多(如第一GUI包括的控件大于第一预定阈值),如淘宝等应用界面,则可以将该第一GUI进行划分以得到多个子界面,从而将多个子界面其中的一个子界面投射到投影区域。或者,如果第一GUI中包括的控件较多,则可以将该第一GUI进行划分以得到多个子界面,从而将多个子界面其中的一个子界面包括的控件投射到投影区域。而如果第一GUI中包括的控件较少(如第一GUI包括的控件小于第二预定阈值,第二预定阈值小于或等于第一预定阈值),如视频应用的播放界面,则可以不对该第一GUI进行划分,而是将该第一GUI中包括的控件投射到投影区域即可,如将视频应用的播放界面包括的播放、暂停、快进等虚拟按键投射到投影区域。In some embodiments, if the first GUI includes more controls (for example, the first GUI includes controls greater than a first predetermined threshold), such as an application interface such as Taobao, the first GUI may be divided to obtain multiple sub-controllers. Interface, thereby projecting one of the multiple sub-interfaces onto the projection area. Alternatively, if there are many controls included in the first GUI, the first GUI may be divided to obtain multiple sub-interfaces, so that the controls included in one of the multiple sub-interfaces are projected to the projection area. If there are fewer controls included in the first GUI (for example, the controls included in the first GUI are less than the second predetermined threshold, and the second predetermined threshold is less than or equal to the first predetermined threshold), such as the playback interface of a video application, the first GUI may be omitted. A GUI is divided, and the controls included in the first GUI can be projected to the projection area, such as projecting virtual keys such as play, pause, and fast forward included in the playback interface of the video application.
其中,上述第一GUI可以是电子设备触摸屏上显示的主屏幕(home screen,主屏幕也可以称为桌面)包括的一个子屏幕,也可以是电子设备中任一应用程序的任一显示界面。在一些实施例中,对第一GUI的划分可以不包括状态栏和导航栏。如果第一GUI为主屏幕包括的一个子屏幕,若该子屏幕包括dock栏,则对第一GUI的划分也可以不包括该dock栏。The first GUI may be a sub-screen included on a home screen (home screen, which may also be referred to as a desktop) displayed on a touch screen of an electronic device, or may be any display interface of any application in the electronic device. In some embodiments, the division of the first GUI may not include a status bar and a navigation bar. If the first GUI is a sub-screen included in the main screen, if the sub-screen includes a dock bar, the division of the first GUI may not include the dock bar.
其中,在一些实施例中,电子设备可以根据N的取值,将上述第一GUI划分为N个子界面。示例性的,N的取值可以是预先配置在电子设备中的,也可以是用户手动设置的,还可以是电子设备根据第一GUI包括的内容自动配置的。In some embodiments, the electronic device may divide the first GUI into N sub-interfaces according to the value of N. Exemplarily, the value of N may be pre-configured in the electronic device, or may be manually set by a user, or may be automatically configured by the electronic device according to content included in the first GUI.
在N的取值是预先配置在电子设备中的情况下,N的取值可以随着电子设备触摸屏尺寸的增大而增加。例如,当电子设备触摸屏的尺寸为5英寸时,N的取值可以为4。当电子设备触摸屏的尺寸为6英寸时,N的取值可以为6。当电子设备触摸屏的尺寸为7英寸时,N的取值可以为9。以第一GUI为主屏幕包括的一个子屏幕为例,如图7A-7C所示,为不同尺寸触摸屏上显示的第一GUI的划分结果示意图。在图7A中,尺寸为5英寸的触摸屏上显示的第一GUI被划分为了4个子界面,分别为子界面1(G1)、子界面2(G2)、子界面3(G3)和子界面4(G4)。在图7B中,尺寸为6英寸的触摸屏上显示的第一GUI被划分为了6个子界面,分别为子界面1(G1)、子界面2(G2)、子界面3(G3)、子界面4(G4)、子界面5(G5)和子界面6(G6)。在图7C中,尺寸为7英寸的触摸屏上显示的第一GUI被划分为了9个子界面,分别 为子界面1(G1)、子界面2(G2)、子界面3(G3)、子界面4(G4)、子界面5(G5)、子界面6(G6)、子界面7(G7)、子界面8(G8)和子界面9(G9)。In the case where the value of N is pre-configured in the electronic device, the value of N may increase as the size of the touch screen of the electronic device increases. For example, when the size of the touch screen of the electronic device is 5 inches, the value of N may be 4. When the size of the touch screen of the electronic device is 6 inches, the value of N can be 6. When the size of the touch screen of the electronic device is 7 inches, the value of N can be 9. Taking a sub-screen included in the first GUI as an example, as shown in FIGS. 7A-7C, it is a schematic diagram of the division results of the first GUI displayed on touch screens of different sizes. In FIG. 7A, the first GUI displayed on the 5-inch touch screen is divided into four sub-interfaces, which are sub-interface 1 (G1), sub-interface 2 (G2), sub-interface 3 (G3), and sub-interface 4 ( G4). In FIG. 7B, the first GUI displayed on the 6-inch touch screen is divided into six sub-interfaces, which are sub-interface 1 (G1), sub-interface 2 (G2), sub-interface 3 (G3), and sub-interface 4. (G4), sub-interface 5 (G5), and sub-interface 6 (G6). In FIG. 7C, the first GUI displayed on the 7-inch touch screen is divided into nine sub-interfaces, which are sub-interface 1 (G1), sub-interface 2 (G2), sub-interface 3 (G3), and sub-interface 4. (G4), sub-interface 5 (G5), sub-interface 6 (G6), sub-interface 7 (G7), sub-interface 8 (G8), and sub-interface 9 (G9).
在N的取值是用户手动设置的情况下,例如,如图6所示,用户可以在电子设备的设置界面601包括的设置选项603中,设置N的取值。When the value of N is manually set by the user, for example, as shown in FIG. 6, the user can set the value of N in a setting option 603 included in the setting interface 601 of the electronic device.
在N的取值是电子设备根据触摸屏上当前显示的GUI包括的内容自动配置的情况下,N的取值可以随着触摸屏上显示的GUI包括的内容的变化而动态改变。例如,触摸屏上显示的GUI包括的控件越多,N的取值越大。例如,如图7D所示,如果电子设备触摸屏上当前显示的GUI为主屏幕的一个子屏幕701,电子设备将N的取值配置为6,即将该子屏幕701划分为6个子界面,分别为子界面1(G1)、子界面2(G2)、子界面3(G3)、子界面4(G4)、子界面5(G5)和子界面6(G6)。如图7E所示,如果电子设备触摸屏上当前显示的GUI为淘宝的界面702,淘宝的界面702包括的控件多于子屏幕701包含的控件,电子设备将N的取值配置为9,即将淘宝的界面702划分为9个子界面,分别为子界面1(G1)、子界面2(G2)、子界面3(G3)、子界面4(G4)、子界面5(G5)、子界面6(G6)、子界面7(G7)、子界面8(G8)和子界面9(G9)。In the case where the value of N is automatically configured by the electronic device according to the content included in the GUI currently displayed on the touch screen, the value of N may be dynamically changed as the content included in the GUI displayed on the touch screen changes. For example, the more controls included on the GUI displayed on the touch screen, the larger the value of N is. For example, as shown in FIG. 7D, if the GUI currently displayed on the touch screen of the electronic device is a sub-screen 701 of the main screen, the electronic device configures the value of N as 6, that is, the sub-screen 701 is divided into 6 sub-interfaces, respectively Sub-interface 1 (G1), sub-interface 2 (G2), sub-interface 3 (G3), sub-interface 4 (G4), sub-interface 5 (G5), and sub-interface 6 (G6). As shown in FIG. 7E, if the GUI currently displayed on the touch screen of the electronic device is Taobao's interface 702, the Taobao's interface 702 contains more controls than the subscreen 701 contains, and the electronic device configures the value of N as 9, which is about to be Taobao Interface 702 is divided into 9 sub-interfaces, which are sub-interface 1 (G1), sub-interface 2 (G2), sub-interface 3 (G3), sub-interface 4 (G4), sub-interface 5 (G5), and sub-interface 6 ( G6), sub-interface 7 (G7), sub-interface 8 (G8), and sub-interface 9 (G9).
这样,电子设备在检测到满足特定条件时,电子设备可以根据N的取值,将上述第一GUI划分为N个子界面,如根据N的取值将第一GUI均分为N个子界面。例如,结合图5A,以N的取值为6为例进行详细说明。在电子设备接收到用户使用左手拇指在电子设备触摸屏上输入具有502所示的滑动轨迹的滑动操作时,电子设备确定该滑动操作为第一操作。如图5B所示,响应于上述确定,电子设备可以根据N的取值(N=6),将第一GUI(第一GUI为主屏幕包括的一个子屏幕501)划分为6个子界面。In this way, when the electronic device detects that certain conditions are met, the electronic device may divide the first GUI into N sub-interfaces according to the value of N, such as dividing the first GUI into N sub-interfaces according to the value of N. For example, with reference to FIG. 5A, a detailed description will be given by taking the value of N as 6 as an example. When the electronic device receives the user's left-hand thumb to input a sliding operation with the sliding track shown in 502 on the electronic device touch screen, the electronic device determines that the sliding operation is the first operation. As shown in FIG. 5B, in response to the above determination, the electronic device may divide the first GUI (the first GUI includes a sub-screen 501 included in the main screen) into 6 sub-interfaces according to the value of N (N = 6).
在其他一些实施例中,电子设备也可以根据第一GUI包括的内容(如第一GUI中控件的布局)将该第一GUI划分为N个子界面。In other embodiments, the electronic device may also divide the first GUI into N sub-interfaces according to the content included in the first GUI (such as the layout of controls in the first GUI).
其中,不同的第一GUI划分得到的子界面的取值以及尺寸可以相同,也可以不同。这样,在电子设备检测到满足特定条件时,电子设备可以根据第一GUI包括的内容,将该第一GUI划分为N个子界面。例如,当第一GUI为微信的界面时,如图8A所示,电子设备在确定满足特定条件时,可以根据电子设备触摸屏上当前显示的微信的界面801中控件的布局,将微信的界面801划分为图8A所示的6个子界面。当第一GUI为淘宝的界面时,如图8B所示,电子设备在确定满足特定条件时,可以根据电子设备触摸屏上当前显示的淘宝的界面802中控件的布局,将淘宝的界面802划分为图8B所示的9个子界面。The values and sizes of the sub-interfaces obtained by different first GUI divisions may be the same or different. In this way, when the electronic device detects that a specific condition is met, the electronic device may divide the first GUI into N sub-interfaces according to the content included in the first GUI. For example, when the first GUI is a WeChat interface, as shown in FIG. 8A, when the electronic device determines that certain conditions are met, the WeChat interface 801 may be changed according to the layout of the controls on the WeChat interface 801 currently displayed on the touch screen of the electronic device. It is divided into 6 sub-interfaces as shown in FIG. 8A. When the first GUI is the interface of Taobao, as shown in FIG. 8B, when the electronic device determines that certain conditions are met, the interface of Taobao 802 can be divided into The nine sub-interfaces shown in FIG. 8B.
其中,上述图5B、图7A-图7E以及图8A-图8B所示的划分得到的子界面的形状(如方形)仅是一种可能的实例,在具体实现中,划分得到的子界面也可以是如圆形、五边形、六边形等规则形状,还可以是不规则形状。可以理解的是,上述子界面的轮廓线可以叠加显示在第一GUI之上(如上述图5B、图7A-图7E以及图8A-图8B中的任一附图所示),这方便用户更直观的进行单手操作;在另一些实施例中,上述子界面的轮廓线也可以不显示在上述第一GUI上。Among them, the shape (such as a square) of the sub-interface obtained by the division shown in FIG. 5B, FIG. 7A to FIG. 7E, and FIG. 8A to FIG. 8B is only one possible example. In a specific implementation, the sub-interface obtained by the division is also It can be a regular shape such as a circle, a pentagon, a hexagon, or an irregular shape. It can be understood that the outlines of the above sub-interfaces can be superimposed and displayed on the first GUI (as shown in any of the above-mentioned Figures 5B, 7A-7E, and 8A-8B), which is convenient for users Perform the one-handed operation more intuitively; in other embodiments, the outline of the sub-interface may not be displayed on the first GUI.
在一些实施例中,电子设备在将上述第一GUI划分为N个子界面后,可以将该N 个子界面中的其中一个子界面(如第一子界面)投射到触摸屏的投影区域,即电子设备在该投影区域显示第一目标界面,该第一目标界面是叠加显示在第一GUI之上的,其内容与N个子界面中的其中一个子界面的内容相同。在其他一些实施例中,电子设备在将上述第一GUI划分为N个子界面后,可以将该N个子界面中的其中一个子界面中所包括的控件投射到触摸屏的投影区域,即电子设备在该投影区域显示第一目标界面包括的控件,该第一目标界面包括的控件是叠加显示在第一GUI之上的。In some embodiments, after the first GUI is divided into N sub-interfaces, the electronic device may project one of the N sub-interfaces (such as the first sub-interface) onto a projection area of the touch screen, that is, the electronic device. A first target interface is displayed in the projection area. The first target interface is superimposed and displayed on the first GUI, and its content is the same as that of one of the N sub-interfaces. In some other embodiments, after the electronic device divides the first GUI into N sub-interfaces, the electronic device may project the controls included in one of the N sub-interfaces onto the projection area of the touch screen. The projection area displays controls included in the first target interface, and the controls included in the first target interface are superimposed and displayed on the first GUI.
在一些实施例中,投影到投影区域的子界面(如第一子界面)的显示效果可以与第一GUI中其他子界面的显示效果不同;如第一子界面的透明度小于第一GUI中其他子界面的透明度,又如,第一子界面的背景颜色为灰色,第一GUI中其他子界面的背景颜色为白色(如,图11A-11B可以是一种示例,其中,图中用斜线填充代表子界面的背景颜色是灰色)。在另外一些实施例中,第一目标界面的显示效果,与投影到投影区域的子界面(如第一子界面)的显示效果相同,并且,其显示效果与第一GUI中其他子界面的显示效果不同;如第一目标界面的透明度与第一子界面的透明度相同,且第一GUI中其他子界面的透明度大于第一目标界面的透明度,又如,第一目标界面的背景颜色和第一子界面的背景颜色均为灰色,且第一GUI中其他子界面的背景颜色为白色(如,图10A-10B可以是一种示例,其中,图中用斜线填充代表子界面的背景颜色是灰色)。这样,用户在投影区域操作时,可以非常直观的知道投影区域内的第一目标界面对应的是第一GUI中的哪个子界面。In some embodiments, the display effect of the sub-interface (such as the first sub-interface) projected onto the projection area may be different from the display effect of other sub-interfaces in the first GUI; for example, the transparency of the first sub-interface is less than that of other sub-interfaces in the first GUI. The transparency of the sub-interface, for example, the background color of the first sub-interface is gray, and the background colors of the other sub-interfaces in the first GUI are white (for example, FIGS. 11A-11B may be an example, in which the figures use diagonal lines) The fill represents the background color of the sub-interface is gray). In other embodiments, the display effect of the first target interface is the same as the display effect of the sub-interface (such as the first sub-interface) projected onto the projection area, and the display effect is the same as that of other sub-interfaces in the first GUI. The effect is different; for example, the transparency of the first target interface is the same as the transparency of the first sub-interface, and the transparency of other sub-interfaces in the first GUI is greater than the transparency of the first target interface. The background colors of the sub-interfaces are all gray, and the background colors of the other sub-interfaces in the first GUI are white (for example, FIGS. 10A-10B can be an example, in which the background color of the sub-interface is represented by diagonal fill in the figure is gray). In this way, when the user operates in the projection area, it can be very intuitive to know which sub-interface in the first GUI corresponds to the first target interface in the projection area.
其中,投影区域是用户在单手握持电子设备时,手指可触及的全部区域或部分区域。该投影区域可以与上述N个子界面中的其中一个子界面所在的区域重合。可以理解的,单手握持可以包括左手握持和右手握持。在用户左手握持电子设备时,用户手指可触及的区域靠近电子设备的左侧边框,在用户右手握持电子设备时,用户手指可触及的区域靠近电子设备的右侧边框。电子设备可以确定投影区域。示例性的,电子设备可以根据用户握持电子设备的握持手势确定投影区域。一般而言,如图9A所示,当用户左手握持电子设备时,用户手指一般握住的是电子设备的左下方,因此,投影区域可以是电子设备触摸屏的左下角区域901。同理,如图9B所示,当用户右手握持电子设备时,用户手指一般握住的是电子设备的右下方,因此,投影区域可以是电子设备触摸屏的右下角区域902。可以理解的是,上述区域901、区域902的形状可以不限于附图9A、附图9B中的矩形,还可以是单手手指所能触及到的扇形区域;本实施例对此不做具体限制。例如,如图9C所示,当用户左手握持电子设备时,投影区域可以是电子设备触摸屏的左下角区域903。同理,如图9D所示,当用户右手握持电子设备时,投影区域可以是电子设备触摸屏的右下角区域904。The projection area is an entire area or a part of the area that can be touched by a finger when the user holds the electronic device with one hand. The projection area may coincide with a region where one of the N sub-interfaces is located. It can be understood that the one-handed holding may include a left-handed holding and a right-handed holding. When the user holds the electronic device with his left hand, the area reachable by the user's finger is close to the left border of the electronic device, and when the user holds the electronic device with his right hand, the area reachable by the user's finger is close to the right border of the electronic device. The electronic device can determine a projection area. Exemplarily, the electronic device may determine the projection area according to a holding gesture of the user holding the electronic device. Generally speaking, as shown in FIG. 9A, when the user holds the electronic device with his left hand, the user's fingers generally hold the lower left of the electronic device. Therefore, the projection area may be the lower left corner area 901 of the touch screen of the electronic device. Similarly, as shown in FIG. 9B, when the user holds the electronic device with his right hand, the user's fingers generally hold the lower right portion of the electronic device. Therefore, the projection area may be the lower right corner area 902 of the touch screen of the electronic device. It can be understood that the shapes of the above-mentioned regions 901 and 902 may not be limited to the rectangles in FIGS. 9A and 9B, and may also be fan-shaped regions that can be touched by a single-handed finger; this embodiment does not specifically limit this. . For example, as shown in FIG. 9C, when the user holds the electronic device with his left hand, the projection area may be the lower left corner area 903 of the touch screen of the electronic device. Similarly, as shown in FIG. 9D, when the user holds the electronic device with his right hand, the projection area may be the lower right corner area 904 of the touch screen of the electronic device.
在另外一些实施例中,电子设备可以利用配置的传感器检测用户握持电子设备的握持手势是左手握持还是右手握持。电子设备也可以根据上述第一操作在触摸屏上的位置来确定用户握持电子设备的握持手势是左手握持还是右手握持。也就是说,电子设备可以根据第一操作确定投影区域。例如,当第一操作在触摸屏上的位置靠近电子设备的触摸屏的左侧时,确定用户握持电子设备的握持手势是左手握持,此时电子设备可以确定投影区域为电子设备触摸屏的左下角区域。当第一操作在触摸屏上的位置靠近电子设备的触摸屏的右侧时,确定用户握持电子设备的握持手势是右手握持,此 时电子设备可以确定投影区域为电子设备触摸屏的左下角区域。In other embodiments, the electronic device may use a configured sensor to detect whether a holding gesture of the user holding the electronic device is left-handed or right-handed. The electronic device may also determine whether the holding gesture of the user holding the electronic device is left-handed or right-handed according to the position of the first operation on the touch screen. That is, the electronic device may determine the projection area according to the first operation. For example, when the position of the first operation on the touch screen is close to the left side of the touch screen of the electronic device, it is determined that the holding gesture of the user holding the electronic device is left hand holding, and at this time, the electronic device may determine that the projection area is the lower left of the touch screen of the electronic device Corner area. When the position of the first operation on the touch screen is close to the right side of the touch screen of the electronic device, it is determined that the holding gesture of the user holding the electronic device is a right-handed hold. At this time, the electronic device may determine that the projection area is the lower left corner of the touch screen of the electronic device .
在一些实施例中,电子设备在将上述第一GUI划分为N个子界面后,可以默认将N个子界面中的第一子界面投射到上述投影区域中,即电子设备在投影区域显示的第一目标界面的内容可以默认与第一子界面的内容相同。其中,该第一子界面可以是N个子界面中具备以下一个或多个条件的子界面:处于操作频率最高的区域中、包括的控件最多、相邻的子界面最多。在其他一些实施例中,电子设备将上述第一GUI划分为N个子界面后,可以默认将N个子界面中的其中一个子界面(如上述第一子界面)所包括的控件投射到上述投影区域中,即电子设备在投影区域显示的控件可以默认与第一子界面包括的控件相同。In some embodiments, after the electronic device divides the first GUI into N sub-interfaces, the first sub-interface of the N sub-interfaces may be projected into the projection area by default, that is, the first display of the electronic device in the projection area is the first The content of the target interface may be the same as the content of the first sub-interface by default. The first sub-interface may be a sub-interface having one or more of the following conditions among the N sub-interfaces: in a region with the highest operating frequency, including the most controls, and having the most adjacent sub-interfaces. In some other embodiments, after the first GUI is divided into N sub-interfaces by the electronic device, the controls included in one of the N sub-interfaces (such as the first sub-interface) may be projected onto the projection area by default. In other words, the controls displayed by the electronic device in the projection area may be the same as the controls included in the first sub-interface by default.
若第一子界面不是用户想要操作子界面,则用户可以在投影区域执行第二操作,如滑动操作。在一些实施例中,响应于该第二操作,电子设备可以将N个子界面中的其他子界面(如第三子界面)投射到上述投影区域中,即电子设备在投影区域显示第三目标界面,该第三目标界面悬浮显示在上述第一GUI之上,该第三目标界面的内容与第三子界面的内容相同。在其他一些实施例中,响应于该第二操作,电子设备可以将在投影区域显示的第三目标界面包括的控件。如果该第三子界面不是用户想要操作的子界面,则用户可以在投影区域执行第二操作,直到将想要操作的子界面投射到投影区域中。If the first sub-interface is not the sub-interface that the user wants to operate, the user may perform a second operation, such as a sliding operation, in the projection area. In some embodiments, in response to the second operation, the electronic device may project other sub-interfaces (such as a third sub-interface) of the N sub-interfaces into the above-mentioned projection area, that is, the electronic device displays a third target interface in the projection area. The third target interface is hovering and displayed on the first GUI, and the content of the third target interface is the same as that of the third sub-interface. In some other embodiments, in response to the second operation, the electronic device may include a control included in the third target interface displayed in the projection area. If the third sub-interface is not the sub-interface that the user wants to operate, the user may perform the second operation in the projection area until the sub-interface that the user wants to operate is projected into the projection area.
示例性的,结合图9A,以用户左手握持电子设备为例。如图10A所示,电子设备将触摸屏上当前显示的第一应用程序的第一GUI划分为9个子界面,分别为子界面1(G1)、子界面2(G2)、子界面3(G3)、子界面4(G4)、子界面5(G5)、子界面6(G6)、子界面7(G7)、子界面8(G8)以及子界面9(G9)。其中,以子界面1(G1)是上述第一子界面为例,在将第一GUI划分完成后,电子设备可以默认将子界面1(G1)投射到触摸屏的投影区域1001中。若用户想要操作的子界面不是子界面1(G1),而是其他子界面例如子界面5(G5),则用户可以在上述投影区域中执行一个滑动操作,如图10B所示,响应于该滑动操作,电子设备将子界面5(G5)投射到投影区域中。电子设备可以根据上述滑动操作的方向的不同,将9个子界面中的不同子界面投射到投影区域中。如图10A所示,如果用户想要操作的子界面是子界面5(G5),则用户可以在投影区域执行方向为向下(如图10A中所示的1002)的滑动操作。Exemplarily, in conjunction with FIG. 9A, a user holds an electronic device with his left hand as an example. As shown in FIG. 10A, the electronic device divides the first GUI of the first application currently displayed on the touch screen into nine sub-interfaces, which are sub-interface 1 (G1), sub-interface 2 (G2), and sub-interface 3 (G3). , Sub-interface 4 (G4), sub-interface 5 (G5), sub-interface 6 (G6), sub-interface 7 (G7), sub-interface 8 (G8), and sub-interface 9 (G9). Taking the sub-interface 1 (G1) as the above-mentioned first sub-interface as an example, after the first GUI is divided, the electronic device may project the sub-interface 1 (G1) into the projection area 1001 of the touch screen by default. If the sub-interface that the user wants to operate is not sub-interface 1 (G1), but other sub-interfaces such as sub-interface 5 (G5), the user can perform a sliding operation in the above projection area, as shown in FIG. 10B, in response to With this sliding operation, the electronic device projects the sub-interface 5 (G5) into the projection area. The electronic device can project different sub-interfaces among the 9 sub-interfaces into the projection area according to the different directions of the sliding operation. As shown in FIG. 10A, if the sub-interface that the user wants to operate is sub-interface 5 (G5), the user can perform a sliding operation in the projection area with a downward direction (such as 1002 shown in FIG. 10A).
例如,结合图5A-图5B,以投射到投影区域的内容为子界面,即在投影区域显示的是目标界面为例进行详细说明。如图11A所示,电子设备将触摸屏上当前显示的主屏幕的一个子屏幕1101划分为6个子界面,其中包括子界面1(G1)和子界面2(G2)。其中,以子界面1(G1)是上述第一子界面,子界面2(G2)为用户想要操作的子界面为例,在将子屏幕1101划分完成后,电子设备可以默认将子界面1(G1)投射到触摸屏的投影区域1102中,即电子设备在投影区域中显示的目标界面的内容与子界面1(G1)的内容相同。若用户想要操作的子界面不是子界面1(G1),而是子界面2(G2),用户可以在投影区域执行方向为向上(如图11A中所示的1103)的滑动操作。如图11B所示,响应于该滑动操作,电子设备将子界面2(G2)投射到触摸屏的投影区域1102中,即此时电子设备在投影区域中显示的目标界面的内容与子界面2(G2)的内 容相同。For example, with reference to FIGS. 5A-5B, the content projected into the projection area is used as a sub-interface, that is, the target interface is displayed in the projection area as an example for detailed description. As shown in FIG. 11A, the electronic device divides one sub-screen 1101 of the main screen currently displayed on the touch screen into six sub-interfaces, including sub-interface 1 (G1) and sub-interface 2 (G2). The sub-interface 1 (G1) is the first sub-interface described above, and the sub-interface 2 (G2) is the sub-interface that the user wants to operate as an example. After the sub-screen 1101 is divided, the electronic device may default to the sub-interface 1 (G1) Projected into the projection area 1102 of the touch screen, that is, the content of the target interface displayed by the electronic device in the projection area is the same as the content of the sub-interface 1 (G1). If the sub-interface that the user wants to operate is not sub-interface 1 (G1), but sub-interface 2 (G2), the user can perform a sliding operation in the projection area with a direction upward (such as 1103 shown in FIG. 11A). As shown in FIG. 11B, in response to the sliding operation, the electronic device projects the sub-interface 2 (G2) into the projection area 1102 of the touch screen, that is, the content of the target interface and the sub-interface 2 ( G2) is the same.
又例如,结合图8B,以投射到投影区域的内容为子界面包括的控件,即在投影区域显示的是目标界面包括的控件为例进行详细说明。如图12A所示,电子设备将触摸屏上当前显示的淘宝的界面1201划分为9个子界面,其中包括子界面1(G1)和子界面2(G2)。其中,以子界面1(G1)是上述第一子界面,子界面2(G2)为用户想要操作的子界面为例,在将淘宝的界面1201划分完成后,电子设备可以默认将子界面1(G1)包括的控件1202和控件1203投射到触摸屏的投影区域1205中,即投影区域显示的控件与子界面1(G1)包括的控件一一相同。若用户想要操作的子界面不是子界面1(G1),而是子界面2(G2),用户可以在投影区域执行方向为向左(如图12A中所示的1206)的滑动操作。如图12B所示,响应于该滑动操作,电子设备将子界面2(G2)包括的控件1204投射到触摸屏的投影区域1205中,即此时电子设备在投影区域中显示的控件与子界面2(G2)包括的控件相同。For another example, in conjunction with FIG. 8B, the content included in the projection area is used as the control included in the sub-interface, that is, the control included in the target interface is displayed in the projection area as an example for detailed description. As shown in FIG. 12A, the electronic device divides the interface 1201 of Taobao currently displayed on the touch screen into 9 sub-interfaces, including sub-interface 1 (G1) and sub-interface 2 (G2). Among them, sub-interface 1 (G1) is the first sub-interface described above, and sub-interface 2 (G2) is the sub-interface that the user wants to operate as an example. After dividing Taobao's interface 1201, the electronic device can default the sub-interface The controls 1202 and 1203 included in 1 (G1) are projected into the projection area 1205 of the touch screen, that is, the controls displayed in the projection area are the same as those included in the sub-interface 1 (G1). If the sub-interface that the user wants to operate is not sub-interface 1 (G1), but sub-interface 2 (G2), the user can perform a sliding operation with the direction to the left (such as 1206 shown in FIG. 12A) in the projection area. As shown in FIG. 12B, in response to the sliding operation, the electronic device projects the control 1204 included in the sub-interface 2 (G2) into the projection area 1205 of the touch screen, that is, the control displayed by the electronic device in the projection area and the sub-interface 2 at this time. (G2) The controls included are the same.
在一些实施例中,实际投射到投影区域的子界面的尺寸可以大于实际划分得到的子界面的尺寸,即在投影区域显示的目标界面的尺寸可以大于对应的子界面的尺寸。例如,当子界面的形状为方形时,实际投射到投影区域的子界面的长大于实际划分得到的子界面的长,和/或,实际投射到投影区域的子界面的宽大于实际划分得到的子界面的宽。又例如,当子界面的形状为圆形时,实际投射到投影区域的子界面的半径大于实际划分得到的子界面的半径。这样,可以避免划分得到的子界面的边缘区域的控件难于触控。示例性的,如图13所示,假设实际划分得到的子界面的长为L,宽为W,可以将该子界面的长和宽分别预留R,然后将长为(L+R),宽为(W+R)的子界面投射到投影区域,也就是说,显示在投影区域的目标界面的尺寸是:长为(L+R),宽为(W+R)。In some embodiments, the size of the sub-interface that is actually projected onto the projection area may be larger than the size of the sub-interface that is actually divided, that is, the size of the target interface displayed in the projection area may be larger than the size of the corresponding sub-interface. For example, when the shape of the sub-interface is square, the length of the sub-interface that is actually projected onto the projection area is greater than the length of the sub-interface that is actually divided, and / or the width of the sub-interface that is actually projected onto the projection area is greater than that obtained from the actual division The width of the child interface. As another example, when the shape of the sub-interface is circular, the radius of the sub-interface that is actually projected onto the projection area is larger than the radius of the sub-interface that is actually divided. In this way, it is possible to avoid that the control of the edge area of the obtained sub-interface is difficult to touch. Exemplarily, as shown in FIG. 13, assuming that the length and width of the sub-interface obtained by actual division are L, the length and width of the sub-interface can be reserved for R, and then the length is (L + R). The sub-interface with a width of (W + R) is projected onto the projection area, that is, the size of the target interface displayed in the projection area is: the length is (L + R) and the width is (W + R).
其中,图9A-图9D,图10A-图10B,图11A-图11B、图12A-图12B以及图13仅是以举例方式给出了本实施例中的投影区域的可能的实例,投影区域的形状和尺寸包括但不限于上图中所示的投影区域。在一些实施例中,电子设备可以根据需要投射到投影区域的子界面(如第一子界面)的尺寸和形状,以及投射比例来确定投影区域的形状和尺寸。投射比例可以指第一子界面的尺寸与目标界面的尺寸的比例,如1:1,1:2,1:0.9等。该投射比例可以是预先配置在电子设备中的,也可以是用户手动设置的(如对应的设置选项可以包含在图6中所示的设置界面601中)。在其他一些实施例中,电子设备也可以按照预设的投射比例(如1:1)来确定投影区域的形状和尺寸,用户还可以通过缩放手势对投影区域的尺寸进行调整(如缩小或放大)。另外,电子设备在投影区域中显示的目标界面的透明度可以是预先设配置在电子设备中的,也可以是用户手动设置的(如对应的设置选项可以包含在图6中所示的设置界面601中)。投影区域在触摸屏中的显示位置也不限于上述附图中的显示位置,用户可以手动调整投影区域在触摸屏中的显示位置。Among them, FIG. 9A to FIG. 9D, FIG. 10A to FIG. 10B, FIG. 11A to FIG. 11B, FIG. 12A to FIG. 12B, and FIG. 13 only give possible examples of the projection area in this embodiment by way of example. The shape and size include, but are not limited to, the projection area shown in the figure above. In some embodiments, the electronic device may determine the shape and size of the projection area according to the size and shape of the sub-interface (such as the first sub-interface) that is projected onto the projection area and the projection ratio. The projection ratio may refer to the ratio of the size of the first sub-interface to the size of the target interface, such as 1: 1, 1: 2, 1: 0.9, and so on. The projection ratio may be pre-configured in the electronic device or manually set by the user (for example, the corresponding setting option may be included in the setting interface 601 shown in FIG. 6). In some other embodiments, the electronic device can also determine the shape and size of the projection area according to a preset projection ratio (such as 1: 1), and the user can also adjust the size of the projection area (such as reducing or enlarging) by using a zoom gesture. ). In addition, the transparency of the target interface displayed by the electronic device in the projection area may be preset in the electronic device or manually set by the user (for example, the corresponding setting option may be included in the setting interface 601 shown in FIG. 6). in). The display position of the projection area on the touch screen is not limited to the display position in the above drawings, and the user can manually adjust the display position of the projection area on the touch screen.
在另外一些实施例中,用户可以通过对投影区域中显示的内容的操作,实现对触摸屏上手指无法触及的区域内的内容的操作。示例性的,用户可以在该投影区域执行第三操作。响应于该第三操作,电子设备在触摸屏上显示GUI,该GUI与电子设备响应于用户在第一GUI中的子界面的对应位置执行的第三操作所显示的GUI相同。例如, 用户对该投影区域中显示的第一控件执行触摸操作,响应于该触摸操作,电子设备可以显示第一应用程序的第二GUI,该第二GUI与电子设备响应于用户在第一GUI中的子界面(如第一子界面)中对第一控件的触摸操作所显示的GUI相同。又例如,用户对该投影区域中显示的第二控件执行触摸操作,响应于该触摸操作,电子设备可以显示第二应用程序的第三GUI,该第三GUI与电子设备响应于用户在目标第一GUI中的子界面(如第一子界面)中对第二控件的触摸操作所显示的GUI相同。In other embodiments, the user can operate the content displayed in the projection area to operate the content in the area that cannot be reached by a finger on the touch screen. Exemplarily, the user may perform a third operation in the projection area. In response to the third operation, the electronic device displays a GUI on the touch screen, which is the same as the GUI displayed by the electronic device in response to the third operation performed by the user in the corresponding position of the sub-interface in the first GUI. For example, the user performs a touch operation on the first control displayed in the projection area. In response to the touch operation, the electronic device may display a second GUI of the first application, and the second GUI and the electronic device respond to the user in the first GUI. The GUI displayed in a touch operation on the first control in a sub-interface (such as the first sub-interface) is the same. For another example, the user performs a touch operation on the second control displayed in the projection area. In response to the touch operation, the electronic device may display a third GUI of the second application program, and the third GUI and the electronic device respond to the user ’s The GUI displayed on a sub-interface (such as the first sub-interface) in a GUI by touching the second control is the same.
其中,用户在上述投影区域的触摸点处的操作可以映射为用户在上述第一GUI中的子界面对应触摸点处的相同操作。例如,如图13所示,用户在投影区域1301的触摸点A处的操作,可以映射为用户在第一GUI中的子界面1302的触摸点a处的相同操作,用户在投影区域1301的触摸点B处的操作,可以映射为用户在第一GUI中的子界面1302的触摸点b处的相同操作。即,电子设备响应于用户在投影区域1301的触摸点A处的操作显示的GUI,与电子设备响应于用户在第一GUI中的子界面1302的触摸点a处的相同操作显示的GUI相同。电子设备响应于用户在投影区域1301的触摸点B处的操作显示的GUI,与电子设备响应于用户在第一GUI中的子界面1302的触摸点b处的相同操作显示的GUI相同。The operation of the user at the touch point of the projection area may be mapped to the same operation of the user at the corresponding touch point of the sub-interface in the first GUI. For example, as shown in FIG. 13, the operation of the user at the touch point A of the projection area 1301 can be mapped to the same operation of the user at the touch point a of the sub-interface 1302 in the first GUI, and the user's touch at the projection area 1301 The operation at the point B may be mapped to the same operation at the touch point b of the user's sub-interface 1302 in the first GUI. That is, the GUI displayed by the electronic device in response to the user's operation at the touch point A of the projection area 1301 is the same as the GUI displayed by the electronic device in response to the same operation by the user at the touch point a of the sub-interface 1302 in the first GUI. The GUI displayed by the electronic device in response to a user's operation at the touch point B of the projection area 1301 is the same as the GUI displayed by the electronic device in response to the same operation by the user at the touch point b of the sub-interface 1302 in the first GUI.
例如,结合图11A,如图14A所示,用户在投影区域1401中显示的相机图标所在触摸点处的操作,可以映射为子界面1402中相机图标所在的触摸点处的相同操作。即如图14A所示,电子设备当前显示的GUI为第一应用程序的第一GUI,即主屏幕的一个子屏幕。当用户对投影区域1401中显示的第二控件,如相机图标执行点击操作时,响应于该点击操作,如图14B所示,电子设备可以显示第二应用程序的第三GUI,即电子设备显示相机的界面1403,其与用户对子界面1402中相机图标执行点击操作显示的GUI相同。For example, in conjunction with FIG. 11A, as shown in FIG. 14A, the operation of the user at the touch point where the camera icon displayed in the projection area 1401 can be mapped to the same operation at the touch point where the camera icon is in the sub-interface 1402. That is, as shown in FIG. 14A, the GUI currently displayed by the electronic device is the first GUI of the first application, that is, a sub-screen of the main screen. When the user performs a click operation on a second control displayed in the projection area 1401, such as a camera icon, in response to the click operation, as shown in FIG. 14B, the electronic device may display a third GUI of the second application, that is, the electronic device display The interface 1403 of the camera is the same as the GUI displayed when the user performs a click operation on the camera icon in the sub-interface 1402.
其中,在一些实施例中,电子设备响应于用户在投影区域执行的第三操作,在触摸屏上显示GUI的具体实现可以是:电子设备可以将第一GUI中投射到投影区域的子界面(如第一子界面)的位图信息存储在缓存中。当电子设备接收到用户在上述投影区域的触摸点(如触摸点A)处的第三操作时,可以根据存储的位图信息和触摸点A的位置坐标,确定该触摸点A的位置坐标对应在第一GUI中的子界面上的触摸点(如触摸点a)的位置坐标。在确定出触摸点a的位置坐标后,电子设备便可以根据触摸点a的位置坐标,对在上述投影区域执行的第三操作进行响应,即在触摸屏上显示上述GUI。Wherein, in some embodiments, the electronic device responds to the third operation performed by the user in the projection area, and the specific implementation of displaying the GUI on the touch screen may be: the electronic device may project a sub-interface of the first GUI onto the projection area (such as The bitmap information of the first sub-interface) is stored in a cache. When the electronic device receives the user's third operation at the touch point (such as touch point A) in the above-mentioned projection area, it can determine the corresponding position coordinates of touch point A according to the stored bitmap information and the position coordinates of touch point A. Position coordinates of a touch point (such as touch point a) on a sub-interface in the first GUI. After determining the position coordinates of the touch point a, the electronic device can respond to the third operation performed on the projection area according to the position coordinates of the touch point a, that is, display the GUI on the touch screen.
在其他一些实施例中,电子设备响应于用户在投影区域执行的第三操作,在触摸屏上显示GUI的具体实现可以是:电子设备可以将第一GUI中投射到投影区域的子界面的位图信息、该子界面对应的应用包名,以及该子界面包括的控件标识(identify,ID)存储在缓存中。当电子设备接收到用户在上述投影区域的触摸点(如触摸点A)处的第三操作时,可以根据触摸点A的位置坐标,存储的位图信息以及该子界面包括的控件ID,确定用户操作的控件的ID。电子设备根据用户操作的控件的ID和存储的应用包名,对在上述投影区域执行的第三操作进行响应,即在触摸屏上显示上述GUI。In some other embodiments, the electronic device responds to the third operation performed by the user in the projection area, and the specific implementation of displaying the GUI on the touch screen may be: the electronic device may project a bitmap of a sub-interface of the first GUI onto the projection area. The information, the application package name corresponding to the sub-interface, and the control identification (identify, ID) included in the sub-interface are stored in the cache. When the electronic device receives the third operation of the user at the touch point (such as touch point A) in the above-mentioned projection area, it may be determined according to the position coordinates of touch point A, the stored bitmap information, and the control ID included in the sub-interface. The ID of the control operated by the user. The electronic device responds to the third operation performed on the projection area according to the ID of the control operated by the user and the stored application package name, that is, displays the GUI on the touch screen.
这样一来,在用户单手握持电子设备时,在该投影区域中便可以实现对触摸屏中手指无法触及的区域上显示内容的操作。并且,通过将触摸屏上当前显示的GUI划分 为多个子界面,并以子界面为单位投射在投影区域中,使得可以将用户手指无法触及的区域显示的内容以相近或相同或较大的比例显示在用户手指可触及的区域中。如此,便可以在不影响用户视觉体验和操作体验的前提下,使得用户可以便捷的对触摸屏中手指无法触及的区域上显示的内容进行操作,实现了电子设备与用户之间的高效互动。In this way, when the user holds the electronic device with one hand, the operation of displaying content on an area that cannot be touched by a finger in the touch screen can be realized in the projection area. In addition, by dividing the GUI currently displayed on the touch screen into multiple sub-interfaces, and projecting them in the projection area in units of sub-interfaces, it is possible to display the content displayed in areas that cannot be touched by the user's finger in a similar or the same or larger proportion In an area reachable by a user's finger. In this way, without affecting the visual experience and operation experience of the user, the user can conveniently operate the content displayed on the area inaccessible to the finger in the touch screen, thereby achieving efficient interaction between the electronic device and the user.
在一些实施例中,电子设备在显示上述GUI,如上述第二GUI或上述第三GUI时,也可以将该GUI划分为多个子界面,并将这多个子界面中的其中一个子界面投射到触摸屏的投影区域。在其他一些实施例中,电子设备在显示上述GUI,如上述第二GUI或上述第三GUI时,也可以将该GUI划分为多个子界面,并将这多个子界面中的其中一个子界面中所包括的控件投射到触摸屏的投影区域。这样,可以方便用户操作。In some embodiments, when the electronic device displays the GUI, such as the second GUI or the third GUI, the GUI may also divide the GUI into multiple sub-interfaces, and project one of the multiple sub-interfaces to The projection area of the touch screen. In some other embodiments, when the electronic device displays the GUI, such as the second GUI or the third GUI, the GUI may also be divided into multiple sub-interfaces, and one of the multiple sub-interfaces may be divided into one of the sub-interfaces. The included controls are projected onto the projection area of the touch screen. In this way, it is convenient for the user to operate.
其中,电子设备划分第二GUI或第三GUI采用的划分规则与划分第一GUI时采用的划分规则可以相同,投射到投影区域的子界面的选择以及投射方法与第一GUI中子界面的选择以及投射方法也可以相同。在其他一些实施例中,电子设备划分第二GUI或第三GUI采用的划分规则与划分第一GUI时采用的划分规则也可以不同,投射到投影区域的子界面的选择以及投射方法与第一GUI中子界面的选择以及投射方法也可以不同。The division rule used by the electronic device to divide the second GUI or the third GUI may be the same as the division rule used when dividing the first GUI. The selection of the sub-interface projected onto the projection area and the projection method and the selection of the sub-interface in the first GUI may be the same. And the projection method can be the same. In some other embodiments, the division rule used by the electronic device to divide the second GUI or the third GUI may be different from the division rule used when dividing the first GUI. The selection of the sub-interface projected onto the projection area and the projection method are different from the first. The sub-interface selection and projection method in the GUI can also be different.
如,电子设备是根据N的取值对第一GUI进行划分的,电子设备也可以根据相同的N值对第三GUI进行划分。例如,结合图14A-图14B,电子设备根据N的取值(N=6)将主屏幕的一子屏幕划分为了6个子界面,且用户对投影区域显示的第二控件执行了触摸操作,如对投影区域中显示的相机图标执行点击操作。如图15所示,电子设备响应于该点击操作,显示第三GUI 1501时,可以根据N的取值(N=6)将第三GUI 1501划分为6个子界面,其中包括子界面1(G1)。另外,电子设备可以将第三GUI 1501划分得到的6个子界面中的子界面1(G1)投射到触摸屏的投影区域1502中,方便用户继续进行单手操作。又例如,电子设备是根据N的取值对第一GUI进行划分的,N的取值是根据触摸屏上当前显示的GUI中的控件数量确定的。例如,电子设备根据第一GUI中控件的数量将第一GUI划分为了N 1个子界面,并将N 1个子界面中的一个子界面投射到了投影区域。用户在投影区域中对第二控件执行了触摸操作。电子设备响应于该触摸操作,显示第三GUI,第三GUI中的控件少于第一GUI中包括的控件,电子设备可以将第三GUI划分为N 2个子界面,N 2小于N 1。电子设备还可以在投影区域显示第二目标界面,该第二目标界面是叠加显示在该第三GUI之上的,且该第二目标界面的内容可以与N 2个子界面中的一个子界面(如第二子界面)的内容相同。 For example, the electronic device divides the first GUI according to the value of N, and the electronic device may also divide the third GUI according to the same value of N. For example, in conjunction with FIGS. 14A-14B, the electronic device divides a sub-screen of the main screen into 6 sub-interfaces according to the value of N (N = 6), and the user performs a touch operation on the second control displayed in the projection area, such as Click on the camera icon displayed in the projection area. As shown in FIG. 15, when the electronic device displays the third GUI 1501 in response to the click operation, the third GUI 1501 can be divided into six sub-interfaces according to the value of N (N = 6), including sub-interface 1 (G1 ). In addition, the electronic device may project the sub-interface 1 (G1) of the six sub-interfaces divided by the third GUI 1501 into the projection area 1502 of the touch screen, which is convenient for the user to continue one-handed operation. For another example, the electronic device divides the first GUI according to the value of N, and the value of N is determined according to the number of controls in the GUI currently displayed on the touch screen. For example, the electronic device divides the first GUI into N 1 sub-interfaces according to the number of controls in the first GUI, and projects one of the N 1 sub-interfaces onto a projection area. The user performed a touch operation on the second control in the projection area. In response to the touch operation, the electronic device displays a third GUI. The third GUI has fewer controls than the first GUI includes. The electronic device can divide the third GUI into N 2 sub-interfaces, and N 2 is less than N 1 . The electronic device may further display a second target interface in the projection area, the second target interface is superimposed and displayed on the third GUI, and the content of the second target interface may be the same as one of the N 2 sub-interfaces ( As in the second sub-interface).
又如,电子设备是根据触摸屏上当前显示的GUI中的控件布局对第一GUI进行划分的,此时电子设备也可以根据第二GUI中的控件布局对第二GUI进行划分。例如,结合图12A,如图16A所示,电子设备将触摸屏上当前显示的第一应用程序的第一GUI,如淘宝的界面1601划分为9个子界面,其中包括子界面1(G1),并将子界面1(G1)包括的控件1602和控件1603投射到触摸屏的投影区域1604中。用户对投影区域1604中包括的第一控件,如控件1605执行了触摸操作。如图16B所示,响应于该触摸操作,电子设备显示第一应用程序的第二GUI,如淘宝的扫一扫界面1606。电子设备在显示淘宝的扫一扫界面1606时,可以根据扫一扫界面1606中的控件布局,对该GUI进行划分。如图16B所示,电子设备将扫一扫界面1606划分为了5个子界 面,其中包括子界面2(G2)和子界面3(G3)。电子设备可以默认将子界面2(G2)包括的控件投射到投影区域1604中。假设用户想要操作的子界面不是子界面2(G2),而是子界面3(G3),用户可以在投影区域执行方向为向左(如图16B中所示的1607)的滑动操作。如图16C所示,响应于该滑动操作,电子设备将子界面3(G3)包括的控件1608投射到触摸屏的投影区域1604中。此时用户便可以对投影区域1604中显示的控件进行操作,以便电子设备响应于用户的操作打开电子设备的相册。或者,电子设备也可以在确定第二GUI,如扫一扫界面1606中包括的控件较少(如第二GUI包括的控件小于预定阈值)的情况下,不对该扫一扫界面1606进行划分,而是将该扫一扫界面1606中包括的所有控件投射到投影区域1604中,即电子设备在投影区域显示至少一个控件,该至少一个控件叠加显示在第二GUI(如扫一扫界面1606)之上,该至少一个控件与第二GUI包括的控件是一一对应的,方便用户操作。For another example, the electronic device divides the first GUI according to the control layout in the GUI currently displayed on the touch screen. At this time, the electronic device can also divide the second GUI according to the control layout in the second GUI. For example, in conjunction with FIG. 12A, as shown in FIG. 16A, the electronic device divides the first GUI of the first application currently displayed on the touch screen, such as the interface 1601 of Taobao, into nine sub-interfaces, including sub-interface 1 (G1), and The controls 1602 and 1603 included in the sub-interface 1 (G1) are projected into a projection area 1604 of the touch screen. The user performs a touch operation on a first control included in the projection area 1604, such as the control 1605. As shown in FIG. 16B, in response to the touch operation, the electronic device displays a second GUI of the first application program, such as Taobao's scan interface 1606. When the electronic device displays the scan interface 1606 of Taobao, the GUI may be divided according to the control layout in the scan interface 1606. As shown in FIG. 16B, the electronic device divides the scan interface 1606 into five sub-interfaces, including sub-interface 2 (G2) and sub-interface 3 (G3). The electronic device may project the controls included in the sub-interface 2 (G2) into the projection area 1604 by default. Assuming that the sub-interface that the user wants to operate is not sub-interface 2 (G2), but sub-interface 3 (G3), the user can perform a sliding operation in the projection area with a direction to the left (such as 1607 shown in FIG. 16B). As shown in FIG. 16C, in response to the sliding operation, the electronic device projects the control 1608 included in the sub-interface 3 (G3) into the projection area 1604 of the touch screen. At this time, the user can operate the controls displayed in the projection area 1604, so that the electronic device opens the photo album of the electronic device in response to the user's operation. Alternatively, the electronic device may not divide the scan interface 1606 when it is determined that the second GUI, such as the scan interface 1606, includes fewer controls (for example, the controls included in the second GUI are less than a predetermined threshold). Instead, all the controls included in the scan interface 1606 are projected into the projection area 1604, that is, the electronic device displays at least one control in the projection area, and the at least one control is displayed superimposed on the second GUI (such as the scan interface 1606) Above, the at least one control corresponds to the control included in the second GUI, which is convenient for user operation.
在一些实施例中,当用户不想使用单手操作模式时,可以触发电子设备退出单手操作模式,如用户可以执行第四操作。电子设备响应于该第四操作,退出单手操作模式。其中,该第四操作可以是用户在电子设备触摸屏上输入的特定操作。示例性的,该特定操作可以为具有特定滑动轨迹的滑动操作。例如,该特定操作为具有指向电子设备左下角的滑动轨迹的滑动操作。在用户左手握持电子设备时,在单手操作模式下,用户可以在投影区域执行具有指向电子设备左下角的滑动轨迹的滑动操作,响应于该滑动操作,电子设备可以退出单手操作模式。或者,该第四操作也可以为用户对电子设备触摸屏上显示的虚拟按钮的操作。或者,第四操作还可以是用户在电子设备触摸屏上投影区域外的区域上执行的操作(如点击操作)。In some embodiments, when the user does not want to use the one-handed operation mode, the electronic device may be triggered to exit the one-handed operation mode, for example, the user may perform a fourth operation. The electronic device exits the one-handed operation mode in response to the fourth operation. The fourth operation may be a specific operation input by a user on a touch screen of the electronic device. Exemplarily, the specific operation may be a sliding operation with a specific sliding track. For example, the specific operation is a sliding operation having a sliding trajectory pointing to the lower left corner of the electronic device. When the user holds the electronic device with his left hand, in the one-handed operation mode, the user can perform a sliding operation with a sliding track pointing to the lower left corner of the electronic device in the projection area. In response to the sliding operation, the electronic device can exit the one-handed operation mode. Alternatively, the fourth operation may also be a user operation on a virtual button displayed on the touch screen of the electronic device. Alternatively, the fourth operation may also be an operation (such as a tap operation) performed by the user on an area outside the projection area on the touch screen of the electronic device.
在其他一些实施例中,电子设备也可以确定在预设时间内没有接收到用户的任何操作时,自动退出单手操作模式。或者,电子设备还可以根据上述第二GUI或第三GUI上用户单手握持时无法触及的区域内是否包含控件,来确定是否退出单手操作模式。也就是说,例如,电子设备在显示第二GUI时,可以判断第二GUI中用户单手握持时无法触及的区域内是否包含控件,若上述第二GUI中用户单手握持时无法触及的区域内不包含控件,则电子设备自动退出单手操作模式,若上述第二GUI中用户单手握持时无法触及的区域内包含控件,则电子设备执行上述将第二GUI划分为多个子界面,并将多个子界面中其中一个子界面(或其中一个子界面中包括的控件)投射到触摸屏的投影区域的操作。这样一来,不仅可以满足用户单手操作的需求,而且在后续显示的GUI上用户单手握持时无法触及的区域内不包含控件时自动退出单手操作模式,提高了用户的使用体验,使得电子设备更加智能。In other embodiments, the electronic device may also automatically exit the one-handed operation mode when it is determined that no operation from the user is received within a preset time. Alternatively, the electronic device may also determine whether to exit the one-handed operation mode based on whether controls are included in an area that cannot be reached when the user holds with one hand on the second GUI or the third GUI. That is, for example, when the electronic device displays the second GUI, it can determine whether the area in the second GUI that the user cannot reach when holding it with one hand contains controls. If the user cannot hold the control in the second GUI with one hand If the area does not contain controls, the electronic device automatically exits the one-handed operation mode. If the area in the second GUI that cannot be reached by the user with one hand is holding controls, the electronic device executes the above-mentioned division of the second GUI into multiple sub-children. Interface, and projecting one of a plurality of sub-interfaces (or a control included in one of the sub-interfaces) onto a projection area of the touch screen. In this way, it can not only meet the user's needs for one-handed operation, but also automatically exit the one-handed operation mode when there are no controls in the area that cannot be reached when the user holds with one hand on the subsequently displayed GUI, which improves the user experience. Make electronic devices smarter.
结合上述实施例及相应的附图,本实施例提供一种界面的显示方法,该方法可以在具有图3所示的硬件结构和/或图4所示的软件结构的电子设备(例如手机、平板电脑等)中实现;如图17所示,该方法具体可以包括以下步骤:With reference to the foregoing embodiments and corresponding drawings, this embodiment provides a method for displaying an interface. The method may be implemented in an electronic device (such as a mobile phone, a mobile phone, a software structure shown in FIG. 3 and / or a software structure shown in FIG. 4). Tablet, etc.); as shown in FIG. 17, the method may specifically include the following steps:
步骤1701:电子设备在触摸屏上显示第一应用程序的第一图形用户界面(GUI),第一GUI包括第一子界面。Step 1701: The electronic device displays a first graphical user interface (GUI) of the first application on the touch screen, and the first GUI includes a first sub-interface.
示例性的,第一应用程序可以为主屏幕程序,第一应用程序的第一GUI是主屏幕包括的一个子屏幕。第一应用程序也可以为其他应用程序,如第三方应用程序或系统应用,第一应用程序的第一GUI是该应用程序的任一显示界面。Exemplarily, the first application program may be a main screen program, and the first GUI of the first application program is a sub-screen included in the main screen. The first application may also be another application, such as a third-party application or a system application, and the first GUI of the first application is any display interface of the application.
步骤1702:电子设备接收开启单手操作模式的操作。Step 1702: The electronic device receives an operation of turning on the one-handed operation mode.
在一些实施例中,电子设备接收开启单手操作模式的操作具体可以为电子设备检测到用户握持电子设备的握持手势为单手握持。例如,可以利用电子设备边框上配置的传感器检测用户握持电子设备的握持手势。在其他一些实施例中,电子设备接收开启单手操作模式的操作,具体的可以为电子设备接收用户在触摸屏上输入的第一操作。例如,该第一操作为上述图5A中所示的滑动操作。该第一操作还可以为对电子设备触摸屏上显示的虚拟按钮的操作,如双击、重压或长按操作等。In some embodiments, the operation that the electronic device receives to open the one-handed operation mode may specifically be that the electronic device detects that the holding gesture of the user holding the electronic device is one-handed holding. For example, a sensor configured on the frame of the electronic device may be used to detect a holding gesture of the user holding the electronic device. In some other embodiments, the electronic device receives the operation of opening the one-handed operation mode. Specifically, the electronic device may receive the first operation input by the user on the touch screen. For example, the first operation is the sliding operation shown in FIG. 5A described above. The first operation may also be an operation on a virtual button displayed on the touch screen of the electronic device, such as a double-click, a heavy press, or a long-press operation.
步骤1703:响应于上述操作,电子设备确定投影区域。Step 1703: In response to the above operation, the electronic device determines a projection area.
在一些实施例中,电子设备可以根据用户握持电子设备的握持手势确定投影区域。例如,如上述图9A-图9D所示,当用户左手握持电子设备时,投影区域可以是电子设备触摸屏的左下角区域,当用户右手握持电子设备时,投影区域可以是电子设备触摸屏的右下角区域。在其他一些实施例中,电子设备可以根据上述操作在触摸屏上的位置确定投影区域。例如,当上述操作在触摸屏上的位置靠近电子设备的触摸屏的左侧时,可以确定投影区域为电子设备触摸屏的左下角区域。当上述操作在触摸屏上的位置靠近电子设备的触摸屏的右侧时,可以确定投影区域为电子设备触摸屏的左下角区域。In some embodiments, the electronic device may determine the projection area according to a holding gesture of the user holding the electronic device. For example, as shown in FIG. 9A to FIG. 9D described above, when the user holds the electronic device with his left hand, the projection area may be the lower left corner area of the touch screen of the electronic device. When the user holds the electronic device with his right hand, the projection area may be the touch screen of the electronic device. Bottom right corner area. In some other embodiments, the electronic device may determine the projection area according to the position of the operation on the touch screen. For example, when the position of the above operation on the touch screen is close to the left side of the touch screen of the electronic device, it may be determined that the projection area is the lower left corner area of the touch screen of the electronic device. When the position of the above operation on the touch screen is close to the right side of the touch screen of the electronic device, it can be determined that the projection area is the lower left corner area of the touch screen of the electronic device.
步骤1704:电子设备在上述投影区域显示第一目标界面,该第一目标界面叠加显示在第一GUI之上,第一目标界面的内容与第一子界面的内容相同。Step 1704: The electronic device displays a first target interface in the above-mentioned projection area. The first target interface is superimposed and displayed on the first GUI, and the content of the first target interface is the same as that of the first sub-interface.
其中,投影区域是用户单手操作时,手指可触及的全部区域或部分区域。The projection area is an entire area or a part of the area that can be touched by a finger when the user performs a single-handed operation.
示例性的,第一子界面可以为第一GUI中具备以下一个或多个条件的子界面:处于操作频率最高的区域中、包括的控件最多、相邻的子界面最多。Exemplarily, the first sub-interface may be a sub-interface in the first GUI that has one or more of the following conditions: it is in the region with the highest operating frequency, includes the most controls, and has the most adjacent sub-interfaces.
在一些实施例中,上述步骤1704可以替换为:电子设备在上述投影区域显示第一目标界面包括的控件。In some embodiments, the above step 1704 may be replaced by: the electronic device displays a control included in the first target interface in the above projection area.
通过上述技术方案,电子设备能够在用户单手操作电子设备时,将电子设备触摸屏上当前显示的GUI中的其中一个子界面(或当前显示的GUI中的其中一个子界面包括的控件),投射到触摸屏上用户手指可触及的区域,即电子设备在投影区域内显示一目标界面,该目标界面叠加显示在当前显示的GUI之上,且该目标界面的内容与该子界面的内容相同,使得用户在投影区域中可以实现对触摸屏上手指无法触及的区域上显示的内容的操作。这样,降低了用户单手操作触摸屏上显示的部分内容的难度,提高了电子设备的使用效率,同时也能提高用户体验。Through the above technical solution, when the user operates the electronic device with one hand, the electronic device can project one of the sub-interfaces (or the controls included in one of the sub-interfaces in the currently displayed GUI) on the touch screen of the electronic device. To the area accessible by the user's finger on the touch screen, that is, the electronic device displays a target interface in the projection area, the target interface is superimposed on the currently displayed GUI, and the content of the target interface is the same as the content of the sub-interface, so that In the projection area, the user can operate the content displayed on the area that cannot be touched by a finger on the touch screen. This reduces the difficulty for the user to operate part of the content displayed on the touch screen with one hand, improves the use efficiency of the electronic device, and can also improve the user experience.
在其他一些实施例中,如图18所示,该显示方法还可以包括以下步骤1801。In other embodiments, as shown in FIG. 18, the display method may further include the following step 1801.
步骤1801、电子设备将上述第一GUI划分为N 1个子界面,该N 1个子界面中包括第一子界面。 Step 1801: The electronic device divides the first GUI into N 1 sub-interfaces, and the N 1 sub-interfaces include a first sub-interface.
示例性的,电子设备可以根据N的取值(N的取值为N 1)将上述第一GUI划分为N 1个子界面。在一些实施例中,该N的取值可以是预先配置在电子设备中的。例如,如上述附图7A-7C所示,N的取值可以根据电子设备触摸屏尺寸的不同而不同,如触摸屏尺寸越大,N的取值越大。在其他一些实施例中,N的取值可以是用户手动设置的。例如,如上述附图6所示,用户可以在设置界面603中对N的取值进行设置。在另外一些实施例中,N的取值可以是电子设备根据第一GUI包括的内容自动配置的。 例如,如上述附图7D-7E所示,随着触摸屏上显示的GUI包括的控件越多,N的取值可以越大。又示例性的,电子设备也可以根据第一GUI包括的内容(如第一GUI中控件的布局)将第一GUI划分为N 1个子界面。例如,如上述附图8A-8B所示,电子设备微信的界面801中控件的布局,将微信的界面801划分为图8A所示的6个子界面。电子设备根据淘宝的界面802中控件的布局,将淘宝的界面802划分为图8B所示的9个子界面。 Exemplarily, the electronic device may divide the first GUI into N 1 sub-interfaces according to the value of N (the value of N is N 1 ). In some embodiments, the value of N may be pre-configured in the electronic device. For example, as shown in the aforementioned FIGS. 7A-7C, the value of N can be different according to the size of the touch screen of the electronic device. For example, the larger the touch screen size is, the larger the value of N is. In other embodiments, the value of N may be manually set by the user. For example, as shown in FIG. 6 described above, the user can set the value of N in the setting interface 603. In other embodiments, the value of N may be automatically configured by the electronic device according to the content included in the first GUI. For example, as shown in the aforementioned FIG. 7D-7E, as the GUI displayed on the touch screen includes more controls, the value of N can be larger. For another example, the electronic device may also divide the first GUI into N 1 sub-interfaces according to the content included in the first GUI (such as the layout of controls in the first GUI). For example, as shown in the foregoing FIGS. 8A-8B, the layout of the controls in the interface 801 of the electronic device WeChat divides the interface 801 of the WeChat into the six sub-interfaces shown in FIG. 8A. The electronic device divides Taobao's interface 802 into nine sub-interfaces as shown in FIG. 8B according to the layout of the controls in Taobao's interface 802.
例如,如上述附图10A所示,电子设备将第一GUI划分得到的9个子界面中的其中一个子界面,如子界面1(G1)投射在投影区域。如上述附图11A所示,电子设备将第一GUI划分得到的6个子界面中的其中一个子界面,如子界面1(G1)投射在投影区域。该第一子界面中可以包括至少一个控件。For example, as shown in FIG. 10A, the electronic device projects one of the nine sub-interfaces obtained by dividing the first GUI, such as sub-interface 1 (G1), onto the projection area. As shown in FIG. 11A, the electronic device projects one of the six sub-interfaces obtained by dividing the first GUI, such as sub-interface 1 (G1), onto the projection area. The first sub-interface may include at least one control.
在一些实施例中,例如,如上述附图12A或图16A所示,电子设备将第一GUI划分得到的9个子界面中的其中一个子界面包括的控件,如子界面1(G1)包括的控件投射在投影区域。In some embodiments, for example, as shown in FIG. 12A or FIG. 16A described above, one of the nine sub-interfaces obtained by dividing the first GUI by the electronic device includes controls included in the sub-interfaces, such as those included in sub-interface 1 (G1). The control is projected on the projection area.
通过上述技术方案,电子设备通过将触摸屏上当前显示的GUI划分为多个子界面,并以子界面为单位投射在投影区域中,使得可以将用户手指无法触及的区域显示的内容以相近或相同或较大的比例显示在用户手指可触及的区域中。如此,便可以在不影响用户视觉体验和操作体验的同时,使得用户可以便捷的对触摸屏上手指无法触及的区域上显示的内容进行操作。Through the above technical solution, the electronic device divides the GUI currently displayed on the touch screen into multiple sub-interfaces and projects them in the projection area in units of sub-interfaces, so that the content displayed in areas that cannot be touched by a user's finger can be similar or the same or A larger scale is displayed in the area accessible to the user's finger. In this way, without affecting the visual experience and operation experience of the user, the user can conveniently operate the content displayed on the area on the touch screen that cannot be reached by a finger.
在一些实施例中,投射到上述投影区域的子界面的尺寸可以大于第一子界面的尺寸。例如,如上述附图13所示,实际划分得到的子界面的长为L,宽为W,投射到投影区域的子界面的长为(L+R),宽为(W+R)。这样,可以避免划分得到的子界面的边缘区域的控件难于触控。In some embodiments, the size of the sub-interface projected onto the projection area may be larger than the size of the first sub-interface. For example, as shown in the above FIG. 13, the length of the sub-interface obtained by actual division is L and the width is W, and the length of the sub-interface projected onto the projection area is (L + R) and the width is (W + R). In this way, it is possible to avoid that the control of the edge area of the obtained sub-interface is difficult to touch.
在一些实施例中,第一子界面的显示效果可以与第一GUI中其他子界面的显示效果不同。例如,如上述附图11A所示,子界面1(G1)与第一GUI中其他子界面的显示效果不同。在其他一些实施例中,第一目标界面的显示效果,与第一子界面的显示效果相同,且其与第一GUI中其他子界面的显示效果不同。例如,如上述附图10A所示,第一目标界面的显示效果与子界面1(G1)的显示效果相同,与子界面2(G2)-子界面9(G9)的显示效果均不同。In some embodiments, the display effect of the first sub-interface may be different from the display effects of other sub-interfaces in the first GUI. For example, as shown in FIG. 11A described above, the display effect of the sub-interface 1 (G1) is different from that of other sub-interfaces in the first GUI. In other embodiments, the display effect of the first target interface is the same as the display effect of the first sub-interface, and it is different from the display effects of other sub-interfaces in the first GUI. For example, as shown in the above FIG. 10A, the display effect of the first target interface is the same as that of the sub-interface 1 (G1), and is different from the display effects of the sub-interface 2 (G2) -sub-interface 9 (G9).
在一些实施例中,上述投影区域与上述N 1个子界面中的一个子界面所在的区域重合。 In some embodiments, the above-mentioned projection area coincides with an area where one of the N 1 sub-interfaces is located.
在一些实施例中,投影区域的形状可以与第一子界面的形状相同,也可以与第一子界面的形状不同。In some embodiments, the shape of the projection area may be the same as the shape of the first sub-interface, or may be different from the shape of the first sub-interface.
在其他一些实施例中,如图19所示,第一GUI该可以包括第三子界面;上述方法还可以包括以下步骤:In other embodiments, as shown in FIG. 19, the first GUI may include a third sub-interface; the above method may further include the following steps:
步骤1901、电子设备接收在上述投影区域中的滑动操作。Step 1901: The electronic device receives a sliding operation in the above-mentioned projection area.
示例性的,当默认投射到投影区域的子界面(即第一子界面)不是用户想要操作的子界面时,用户可以在投影区域执行滑动操作,以便电子设备其他用户想要操作的子界面投射到投影区域中。例如,如上述附图10A所示,电子设备默认将子界面1(G1)投射到投影区域,如果子界面1(G1)不是用户想要操作的子界面,用户可以执行图 10A中所示的滑动操作。如上述附图11A所示,电子设备默认将子界面1(G1)投射到投影区域,如果子界面1(G1)不是用户想要操作的子界面,用户可以执行图11A中所示的滑动操作。Exemplarily, when the sub-interface (that is, the first sub-interface) that is projected onto the projection area by default is not the sub-interface that the user wants to operate, the user can perform a sliding operation in the projection area so that other users of the electronic device want to operate the sub-interface Projected into the projection area. For example, as shown in the above FIG. 10A, the electronic device projects the sub-interface 1 (G1) into the projection area by default. If the sub-interface 1 (G1) is not the sub-interface that the user wants to operate, the user can execute the Slide operation. As shown in the above FIG. 11A, the electronic device projects the sub-interface 1 (G1) into the projection area by default. If the sub-interface 1 (G1) is not the sub-interface that the user wants to operate, the user can perform the sliding operation shown in FIG. 11A .
步骤1902、响应于上述滑动操作,电子设备在投影区域显示第三目标界面,该第三目标界面叠加显示在第一GUI之上,第三目标界面的内容与第三子界面的内容相同。Step 1902: In response to the sliding operation, the electronic device displays a third target interface in the projection area. The third target interface is superimposed and displayed on the first GUI, and the content of the third target interface is the same as that of the third sub-interface.
例如,如上述附图10B所示,响应于滑动操作(如图10A所示),电子设备在投影区域显示第三目标界面,第三目标界面叠加显示在第一GUI之上,第三目标界面的内容与子界面5(G5)的内容相同。如上述附图11B所示,响应于滑动操作(如图11A所示),电子设备在投影区域显示第三目标界面,第三目标界面的内容与子界面2(G2)的内容相同。其中,电子设备可以根据上述滑动操作的方向的不同,将不同的子界面投射到投影区域中。For example, as shown in FIG. 10B described above, in response to the sliding operation (as shown in FIG. 10A), the electronic device displays a third target interface in the projection area, the third target interface is superimposed and displayed on the first GUI, and the third target interface The content is the same as that of sub-screen 5 (G5). As shown in FIG. 11B above, in response to the sliding operation (as shown in FIG. 11A), the electronic device displays a third target interface in the projection area, and the content of the third target interface is the same as that of the sub-interface 2 (G2). The electronic device can project different sub-interfaces into the projection area according to different directions of the sliding operation.
在一些实施例中,上述步骤1902可以替换为:电子设备在投影区域显示上述第三目标界面包括的控件。例如,如上述附图12B所示,响应于上述滑动操作,电子设备将第一GUI划分得到的多个子界面中的其中一个子界面,如子界面2(G2)包括的控件投射到投影区域。In some embodiments, the above step 1902 may be replaced by: the electronic device displays a control included in the third target interface in the projection area. For example, as shown in FIG. 12B described above, in response to the sliding operation, the electronic device projects one of a plurality of sub-interfaces obtained by dividing the first GUI, such as controls included in sub-interface 2 (G2), onto a projection area.
在其他一些实施例中,如图20所示,上述方法还可以包括以下步骤2001-步骤2002:In some other embodiments, as shown in FIG. 20, the above method may further include the following steps 2001 to 2002:
步骤2001:电子设备接收针对上述投影区域中的第一控件的触摸操作。Step 2001: The electronic device receives a touch operation on the first control in the above-mentioned projection area.
步骤2002:响应于上述触摸操作,电子设备在触摸屏上显示上述第一应用程序的第二GUI。Step 2002: In response to the touch operation, the electronic device displays the second GUI of the first application on the touch screen.
其中,该第二GUI与电子设备响应于用户在第一子界面中对第一控件的触摸操作所显示的GUI相同。例如,如上述附图16A-16B所示,用户在投影区域中对第一控件,如控件1605执行触摸操作,电子设备可以显示第一应用程序的第二GUI,即淘宝的扫一扫界面,其与电子设备响应于用户对对应子界面(如子界面1(G1))中控件1602的触摸操作显示的GUI相同。The second GUI is the same as the GUI displayed by the electronic device in response to a user's touch operation on the first control in the first sub-interface. For example, as shown in the above-mentioned FIGS. 16A-16B, when a user performs a touch operation on a first control such as control 1605 in the projection area, the electronic device may display the second GUI of the first application, that is, the sweeping interface of Taobao. It is the same as the GUI displayed by the electronic device in response to a user's touch operation on a control 1602 in a corresponding sub-interface (such as sub-interface 1 (G1)).
在一些实施例中,电子设备在显示第二GUI时,可以采用与第一GUI相同的划分规则对第二GUI进行划分。第二GUI划分得到的子界面的数量与第一GUI划分得到的子界面的数量可以相同,也可以不同。例如,电子设备是根据GUI中的控件布局对第一GUI进行划分的,如上述附图16B所示,电子设备也可以根据第二GUI,如扫一扫界面1606中的控件布局,对该扫一扫界面1606进行划分,其划分得到子界面的数量为5,不同于第一GUI划分得到的子界面的数量9。In some embodiments, when the electronic device displays the second GUI, the second GUI may be divided using the same division rule as the first GUI. The number of sub-interfaces obtained by dividing the second GUI may be the same as or different from the number of sub-interfaces obtained by dividing the first GUI. For example, the electronic device divides the first GUI according to the control layout in the GUI. As shown in FIG. 16B described above, the electronic device can also scan the scan according to the control layout in the interface 1606. The scan interface 1606 is divided, and the number of sub-interfaces obtained by the division is 5, which is different from the number of sub-interfaces obtained by the first GUI division of 9.
在其他一些实施例中,第二GUI中包括的控件数量小于预定阈值。上述方法还可以包括以下步骤2003:In some other embodiments, the number of controls included in the second GUI is less than a predetermined threshold. The above method may further include the following steps 2003:
步骤2003:电子设备在上述投影区域显示至少一个控件,该至少一个控件叠加显示在第二GUI之上,至少一个控件与第二GUI包括的控件一一相同。Step 2003: The electronic device displays at least one control in the above-mentioned projection area. The at least one control is superimposed and displayed on the second GUI, and the at least one control is the same as the control included in the second GUI.
例如,第二GUI为扫一扫界面1606。电子设备可以为不对该扫一扫界面1606进行划分,而是将该扫一扫界面1606中包括的所有控件投射在投影区域中,方便用户操作。For example, the second GUI is the scan interface 1606. The electronic device may not divide the scan interface 1606, but project all the controls included in the scan interface 1606 into the projection area, which is convenient for users to operate.
在另外一些实施例中,如图21所示,上述方法还可以包括以下步骤2101-步骤 2102:In other embodiments, as shown in FIG. 21, the above method may further include the following steps 2101 to 2102:
步骤2101:电子设备接收针对上述投影区域中的第二控件的触摸操作。Step 2101: The electronic device receives a touch operation on the second control in the above-mentioned projection area.
步骤2102:响应于上述触摸操作,电子设备在触摸屏上显示第二应用程序的第三GUI。Step 2102: In response to the touch operation, the electronic device displays a third GUI of the second application on the touch screen.
其中,第三GUI与电子设备响应于用户在第一子界面中对第二控件的触摸操作所显示的GUI相同。例如,如上述附图14A-14B所示,用户在投影区域中对第二控件,如相机图标执行触摸操作,如点击操作,电子设备可以显示第二应用程序的第三GUI,即电子设备显示相机的界面,其与电子设备响应于用户对对应子界面(如子界面1402)中相机图标执行点击操作显示的GUI相同。The third GUI is the same as the GUI displayed by the electronic device in response to a user's touch operation on the second control in the first sub-interface. For example, as shown in the above-mentioned FIGS. 14A-14B, the user performs a touch operation on the projection area, such as a camera icon, such as a click operation, and the electronic device may display a third GUI of the second application, that is, the electronic device display The interface of the camera is the same as the GUI displayed by the electronic device in response to a user performing a click operation on a camera icon in a corresponding sub-interface (such as the sub-interface 1402).
在一些实施例中,电子设备在显示第三GUI时,可以采用与第一GUI相同的划分规则对第三GUI进行划分。例如,电子设备将第一GUI划分为了6个子界面,如上述附图15所示,电子设备也可以将第三GUI划分为6个子界面。In some embodiments, when the electronic device displays the third GUI, the third GUI may be divided using the same division rule as the first GUI. For example, the electronic device divides the first GUI into six sub-interfaces. As shown in FIG. 15 above, the electronic device may also divide the third GUI into six sub-interfaces.
在其他一些实施例中,第三GUI包括的控件少于第一GUI包括的控件。上述方法还可以包括以下步骤2103-步骤2104:In some other embodiments, the third GUI includes fewer controls than the first GUI includes. The above method may further include the following steps 2103-2104:
步骤2103:电子设备将上述第三GUI划分为N 2个子界面,该N 2个子界面包括第二子界面,N 2小于N 1Step 2103: The electronic device divides the third GUI into N 2 sub-interfaces. The N 2 sub-interfaces include a second sub-interface, and N 2 is less than N 1 .
例如,电子设备是根据N的取值对第一GUI进行划分的,N的取值是根据触摸屏上当前显示的GUI中的控件数量确定的。例如,电子设备根据第一GUI中控件的数量将第一GUI划分为了N 1个子界面,并将N 1个子界面中的一个子界面投射到了投影区域。用户在投影区域中对第二控件执行了触摸操作。电子设备响应于该触摸操作,显示第三GUI,第三GUI中的控件少于第一GUI中包括的控件,电子设备可以将第三GUI划分为N 2个子界面。 For example, the electronic device divides the first GUI according to the value of N, and the value of N is determined according to the number of controls in the GUI currently displayed on the touch screen. For example, the electronic device divides the first GUI into N 1 sub-interfaces according to the number of controls in the first GUI, and projects one of the N 1 sub-interfaces onto a projection area. The user performed a touch operation on the second control in the projection area. In response to the touch operation, the electronic device displays a third GUI. The third GUI has fewer controls than the first GUI. The electronic device can divide the third GUI into N 2 sub-interfaces.
步骤2104:电子设备在投影区域显示第二目标界面,该第二目标界面叠加显示在上述第三GUI之上,该第二目标界面的内容与第二子界面的内容相同。Step 2104: The electronic device displays a second target interface in the projection area. The second target interface is superimposed and displayed on the third GUI. The content of the second target interface is the same as that of the second sub-interface.
在电子设备将第三GUI划分为多个子界面后,可以将第三GUI中的其中一个子界面投射到投影区域,方便用户继续进行单手操作。After the electronic device divides the third GUI into a plurality of sub-interfaces, one of the sub-interfaces in the third GUI may be projected onto the projection area, which is convenient for the user to continue one-handed operation.
在一些实施例中,步骤2104可以替换为:电子设备在投影区域显示上述第二目标界面包括的控件。In some embodiments, step 2104 may be replaced by: the electronic device displays the control included in the second target interface in the projection area.
在另外一些实施例中,上述方法还可以包括:电子设备接收用户在触摸屏上投影区域外的触摸操作。响应于该触摸操作,电子设备退出单手操作模式。In some other embodiments, the above method may further include: the electronic device receives a touch operation outside the projection area of the user on the touch screen. In response to the touch operation, the electronic device exits the one-handed operation mode.
在一些实施例中,上述第一目标界面的尺寸与第一子界面的尺寸相同,且第一子界面的尺寸与第一GUI中的其他子界面的尺寸不同。In some embodiments, the size of the first target interface is the same as the size of the first sub-interface, and the size of the first sub-interface is different from the sizes of other sub-interfaces in the first GUI.
在一些实施例中,上述叠加显示是指第一目标界面悬浮显示在第一GUI之上。In some embodiments, the above-mentioned superimposed display means that the first target interface is suspended and displayed on the first GUI.
在一些实施例中,上述叠加显示是指第一目标界面显示在第一GUI之上,且第一GUI做高斯模糊处理。In some embodiments, the above-mentioned overlay display means that the first target interface is displayed on the first GUI, and the first GUI performs Gaussian blur processing.
结合上述实施例及相应的附图,本实施例提供另一种界面的显示方法,该方法可以在具有图3所示的硬件结构和/或图4所示的软件结构的电子设备(例如手机、平板电脑等)中实现;如图22所示,该方法具体可以包括以下步骤:With reference to the above embodiments and corresponding drawings, this embodiment provides another interface display method. The method may be implemented in an electronic device (such as a mobile phone) having a hardware structure shown in FIG. 3 and / or a software structure shown in FIG. 4. , Tablet, etc.); as shown in FIG. 22, the method may specifically include the following steps:
步骤2201:电子设备在触摸屏上显示第一应用程序的第一GUI。Step 2201: The electronic device displays the first GUI of the first application on the touch screen.
步骤2202:电子设备接收开启单手操作模式的操作。Step 2202: The electronic device receives an operation of turning on the one-handed operation mode.
例如,上述开启单手操作模式的操作可以为上述附图5A中所示的滑动操作。For example, the operation for turning on the one-handed operation mode may be the sliding operation shown in FIG. 5A.
步骤2203:响应于上述操作,电子设备确定投影区域,该投影区域为用户单手操作电子设备时手指可触及的区域。Step 2203: In response to the above operation, the electronic device determines a projection area, which is an area that can be touched by a finger when the user operates the electronic device with one hand.
例如,上述投影区域可以上述附图9A-9D中任一所示的投影区域。For example, the above-mentioned projection area may be the above-mentioned projection area shown in any one of FIGS. 9A-9D.
步骤2204:电子设备将上述第一GUI划分为N 1个子界面,该N 1个子界面中包括第一子界面,电子设备在投影区域显示第一目标界面,该第一目标界面叠加显示在上述第一GUI之上,该第一目标界面的内容与第一子界面的内容相同。 Step 2204: The electronic device divides the first GUI into N 1 sub-interfaces. The N 1 sub-interface includes a first sub-interface. The electronic device displays a first target interface in a projection area, and the first target interface is superimposed and displayed on the first sub-interface. Above a GUI, the content of the first target interface is the same as the content of the first sub-interface.
步骤2204可以替换为:电子设备将上述第一GUI划分为N 1个子界面,该N 1个子界面中包括第一子界面,电子设备在投影区域显示第一目标界面包括的控件,该第一目标界面包括的控件叠加显示在上述第一GUI之上,该第一目标界面的内容与第一子界面的内容相同。 Step 2204 may be replaced by: the electronic device divides the first GUI into N 1 sub-interfaces, and the N 1 sub-interfaces include the first sub-interface, and the electronic device displays controls included in the first target interface in the projection area, and the first target The controls included in the interface are superimposed and displayed on the first GUI, and the content of the first target interface is the same as that of the first sub-interface.
步骤2205:电子设备接收针对上述投影区域中的第一控件的第一触摸操作。Step 2205: The electronic device receives a first touch operation on the first control in the above-mentioned projection area.
步骤2206:响应于上述第一触摸操作,电子设备在触摸屏上显示第一应用程序的第二GUI,该第二GUI中的控件数量小于预定阈值。Step 2206: In response to the first touch operation, the electronic device displays a second GUI of the first application on the touch screen, and the number of controls in the second GUI is less than a predetermined threshold.
步骤2207:电子设备在投影区域显示至少一个控件,该至少一个控件叠加显示在上述第二GUI之上,该至少一个控件与第二GUI包括的控件一一相同,该至少一个控件中包括第二控件。Step 2207: The electronic device displays at least one control in the projection area. The at least one control is superimposed on the second GUI. The at least one control is the same as the control included in the second GUI. The at least one control includes the second control. Controls.
例如,第二GUI为上述附图16B所示的扫一扫界面1606,如果其包括的控件数量小于预定阈值,则可以不对该界面进行划分,而是将该界面中的控件投射在投影区域。For example, the second GUI is the scan interface 1606 shown in FIG. 16B. If the number of controls included in the second GUI is less than a predetermined threshold, the interface may not be divided, but the controls in the interface may be projected on the projection area.
步骤2208:电子设备接收针对上述投影区域中的第二控件的第二触摸操作。Step 2208: The electronic device receives a second touch operation on the second control in the above-mentioned projection area.
例如,第二控件可以为上述附图16B中所示的相册按钮。For example, the second control may be the album button shown in FIG. 16B described above.
步骤2209:响应于上述第二触摸操作,电子设备在触摸屏上显示第二应用程序的第三GUI,该第三GUI中包括的控件少于第一GUI中包括的控件。Step 2209: In response to the second touch operation, the electronic device displays a third GUI of the second application on the touch screen, and the third GUI includes fewer controls than the first GUI.
例如,响应于用户对上述附图16B中所示的相册按钮的触发操作,电子设备可以在触摸屏上显示相册的界面。For example, in response to a user's triggering operation on the album button shown in FIG. 16B described above, the electronic device may display an interface of the album on the touch screen.
步骤2210:电子设备将上述第三GUI划分为N 2个子界面,该N 2个子界面包括第二子界面,N 2小于N 1;在投影区域显示第二目标界面,该第二目标界面叠加显示在第三GUI之上,该第二目标界面的内容与第二子界面的内容相同。 Step 2210: The electronic device divides the third GUI into N 2 sub-interfaces. The N 2 sub-interfaces include a second sub-interface, and N 2 is less than N 1. A second target interface is displayed in the projection area, and the second target interface is superimposed and displayed. On the third GUI, the content of the second target interface is the same as the content of the second sub-interface.
在电子设备在投影区域显示第二目标界面之后,电子设备可以在检测到对投影区域中的第三控件的第三触摸操作时,响应于该第三触摸操作,电子设备在触摸屏上显示第四GUI;电子设备根据第四GUI的内容判断是否要确定投影区域,如果要确定投影区域,电子设备可以确定投影区域,将第四GUI划分为N 3个子界面,该N 3个子界面包括第三子界面,并在投影区域显示第三目标界面,该第三目标界面叠加显示在第四GUI之上,该第三目标界面的内容与第三子界面的内容相同;如果不要确定投影区域,电子设备可以不对第四GUI进行划分,也就是说,正常显示该第四GUI。 After the electronic device displays the second target interface in the projection area, when the electronic device detects a third touch operation on the third control in the projection area, in response to the third touch operation, the electronic device displays a fourth on the touch screen. GUI; the electronic device determines whether to determine the projection area according to the content of the fourth GUI. If the projection area is to be determined, the electronic device may determine the projection area and divide the fourth GUI into N 3 sub-interfaces, and the N 3 sub-interfaces include a third sub-interface. Interface, and a third target interface is displayed in the projection area, and the third target interface is superimposed on the fourth GUI, and the content of the third target interface is the same as that of the third sub-interface; if the projection area is not determined, the electronic device The fourth GUI may not be divided, that is, the fourth GUI is displayed normally.
本实施例提供的技术方案,电子设备能够在用户单手操作电子设备时,将电子设备触摸屏上当前显示的GUI中的其中一个子界面,投射到触摸屏上用户手指可触及的 区域,即电子设备在投影区域内显示一目标界面,该目标界面叠加显示在当前显示的GUI之上,且该目标界面的内容与该子界面的内容相同,使得用户在投影区域中可以实现对触摸屏上手指无法触及的区域上显示的内容的操作。这样,降低了用户单手操作触摸屏上显示的部分内容的难度,提高了电子设备的使用效率,同时也能提高用户体验。并且,电子设备可以根据触摸屏上显示的GUI中所包括的控件的数量,采用适合该GUI特点的划分方案对该GUI进行划分或者不进行划分,使得电子设备的界面划分更加智能,同时提高了用户体验。According to the technical solution provided in this embodiment, when the user operates the electronic device with one hand, the electronic device can project one of the sub-interfaces in the GUI currently displayed on the touch screen of the electronic device onto an area accessible to the user's finger on the touch screen, that is, the electronic device. A target interface is displayed in the projection area, the target interface is superimposed on the currently displayed GUI, and the content of the target interface is the same as the content of the sub-interface, so that the user can realize that the finger on the touch screen cannot be reached in the projection area. The operation of the content displayed on the area. This reduces the difficulty for the user to operate part of the content displayed on the touch screen with one hand, improves the use efficiency of the electronic device, and can also improve the user experience. In addition, according to the number of controls included in the GUI displayed on the touch screen, the electronic device can divide or not divide the GUI by using a division scheme suitable for the characteristics of the GUI, so that the interface division of the electronic device is more intelligent, and the user is improved. Experience.
应当理解的是,本实施例中对技术特征、技术方案或类似语言的描述并不是暗示在任意的单个实施例中可以实现所有的特点。还可以任何适当的方式组合本实施例中所描述的技术特征和技术方案。It should be understood that the description of technical features, technical solutions, or similar language in this embodiment does not imply that all features can be realized in any single embodiment. The technical features and technical solutions described in this embodiment can also be combined in any suitable manner.
本实施例还提供另一种界面的显示方法,在该界面的显示方法中,电子设备可以将触摸屏上当前显示的GUI划分为M个子界面(M为大于或等于2的整数)。在一些实施例中,电子设备可以将M个子界面中的多个子界面分别投射在电子设备的多个投影区域中。其中,多个投影区域的尺寸和形状可以相同,也可以不同。示例性的,电子设备可以在第一投影区域中显示第一目标界面,该第一目标界面叠加显示在该GUI之上,且该第一目标界面的内容与M个子界面中的第一子界面的内容相同;在第二投影区域中显示第二目标界面,该第二目标界面叠加显示在该GUI之上,且该第二目标界面的内容与M个子界面中的第二子界面的内容相同。在其他一些实施例中,电子设备将M个子界面中的多个子界面包括的控件分别投射在电子设备的多个投影区域。示例性的,电子设备可以在投影区域中显示第一目标界面所包括的控件,该第一目标界面所包括的控件叠加显示在该GUI之上,且该第一目标界面的内容与M个子界面中的第一子界面的内容相同;在第二投影区域中显示第二目标界面所包括的控件,该第二目标界面所包括的控件叠加显示在该GUI之上,且该第二目标界面的内容与M个子界面中的第二子界面的内容相同。This embodiment also provides another interface display method. In this interface display method, the electronic device may divide the GUI currently displayed on the touch screen into M sub-interfaces (M is an integer greater than or equal to 2). In some embodiments, the electronic device may project multiple sub-interfaces out of the M sub-interfaces into multiple projection areas of the electronic device, respectively. The sizes and shapes of the plurality of projection areas may be the same or different. Exemplarily, the electronic device may display a first target interface in the first projection area, the first target interface is superimposed and displayed on the GUI, and the content of the first target interface and the first sub-interface among the M sub-interfaces The content of is the same; the second target interface is displayed in the second projection area, the second target interface is superimposed on the GUI, and the content of the second target interface is the same as the content of the second sub-interface among the M sub-interfaces . In some other embodiments, the electronic device projects the controls included in the multiple sub-interfaces among the M sub-interfaces respectively on multiple projection areas of the electronic device. Exemplarily, the electronic device may display controls included in the first target interface in the projection area, and the controls included in the first target interface are superimposed and displayed on the GUI, and the content of the first target interface and the M sub-interfaces The content of the first sub-interface is the same; the controls included in the second target interface are displayed in the second projection area, and the controls included in the second target interface are superimposed and displayed on the GUI, and the The content is the same as that of the second sub-interface among the M sub-interfaces.
其中,该多个投影区域可以位于电子设备的触摸屏同一侧,也可以位于电子设备触摸屏的不同侧。例如,电子设备可以将M个子界面中的两个子界面分别投射到电子设备的两个投影区域中,该两个投影区域可以位于电子设备触摸屏的同一侧,如触摸屏的左下角或右下角,该两个投影区域也可以位于电子设备触摸屏的不同侧,如其中一个投影区域位于触摸屏的左下角,另一个投影区域位于触摸屏的右下角。The multiple projection areas may be located on the same side of the touch screen of the electronic device, or may be located on different sides of the touch screen of the electronic device. For example, the electronic device may project two of the M sub-interfaces into two projection areas of the electronic device, and the two projection areas may be located on the same side of the touch screen of the electronic device, such as the lower left corner or the lower right corner of the touch screen. The two projection areas may also be located on different sides of the touch screen of the electronic device, for example, one of the projection areas is located at the lower left corner of the touch screen, and the other projection area is located at the lower right corner of the touch screen.
例如,如图23所示,电子设备可以将触摸屏上当前显示的GUI,如微信的界面2301划分为6个子界面,其中包括子界面1(G1)和子界面2(G2)。电子设备可以将子界面1(G1)包括的控件投射到触摸屏的第一投影区域2302中,将子界面2(G2)包括的控件投射到触摸屏的第二投影区域2303中。For example, as shown in FIG. 23, the electronic device may divide a GUI currently displayed on the touch screen, such as WeChat interface 2301, into six sub-interfaces, including sub-interface 1 (G1) and sub-interface 2 (G2). The electronic device may project the controls included in the sub-interface 1 (G1) into the first projection area 2302 of the touch screen, and project the controls included in the sub-interface 2 (G2) into the second projection area 2303 of the touch screen.
在另外一些实施例中,电子设备也可以不对触摸屏上当前显示的GUI进行划分,而是根据触摸屏上当前显示的GUI中包括的控件的类型的不同,将不同类型的控件投射到不同的投影区域。In other embodiments, the electronic device may not divide the GUI currently displayed on the touch screen, but may project different types of controls to different projection areas according to different types of controls included in the GUI currently displayed on the touch screen. .
在该实施例中,电子设备对投影区域中显示的内容的操作,可以映射为电子设备对GUI中对应内容的操作。在用户对投影区域中显示的内容进行操作后,电子设备响应于该操作可以显示其他的GUI,对于显示的其他GUI,仍可以对其进行划分并对将 其子界面投射到投影区域。其具体描述可以参考其他实施例中对应内容的具体描述,此处不再一一赘述。In this embodiment, the operation of the electronic device on the content displayed in the projection area may be mapped to the operation of the electronic device on the corresponding content in the GUI. After the user operates the content displayed in the projection area, the electronic device may display other GUIs in response to the operation, and for the displayed other GUIs, it can still divide it and project its sub-interface to the projection area. For specific descriptions, reference may be made to specific descriptions of corresponding content in other embodiments, and details are not described herein again.
可以理解的是,上述电子设备为了实现上述功能,其包含了执行各个功能相应的硬件结构和/或软件模块。本领域技术人员应该很容易意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤,本实施例能够以硬件或硬件和计算机软件的结合形式来实现。某个功能究竟以硬件还是计算机软件驱动硬件的方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本实施例的范围。It can be understood that, in order to implement the foregoing functions, the foregoing electronic device includes a hardware structure and / or a software module corresponding to performing each function. Those skilled in the art should easily realize that, in combination with the units and algorithm steps of each example described in the embodiments disclosed herein, this embodiment can be implemented in the form of hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a certain function is performed by hardware or computer software-driven hardware depends on the specific application of the technical solution and design constraints. Professional technicians can use different methods to implement the described functions for each specific application, but such implementation should not be considered to be beyond the scope of this embodiment.
本实施例还提供一种实现上述各方法实施例的电子设备。具体的,可以对该电子设备进行功能模块的划分,例如,可以对应各个功能划分各个功能模块,也可以将两个或两个以上的功能集成在一个处理模块中。上述集成的模块既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用软件功能模块的形式实现。需要说明的是,本实施例中对模块的划分是示意性的,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式。This embodiment also provides an electronic device that implements the foregoing method embodiments. Specifically, the electronic device may be divided into functional modules, for example, each functional module may be divided corresponding to each function, or two or more functions may be integrated into one processing module. The above integrated modules may be implemented in the form of hardware or software functional modules. It should be noted that the division of the modules in this embodiment is schematic, and is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be another division manner.
在采用对应各个功能划分各个功能模块的情况下,图24示出了上述实施例中所涉及的电子设备的一种可能的结构示意图,该电子设备可以包括:显示单元2401、输入单元2402、确定单元2403。In a case where each functional module is divided according to each function, FIG. 24 shows a possible structural diagram of an electronic device involved in the foregoing embodiment. The electronic device may include: a display unit 2401, an input unit 2402, and a determination. Unit 2403.
其中,显示单元2401,用于支持电子设备执行上述方法实施例中的步骤1701、步骤1704、步骤1902、步骤2002、步骤2003、步骤2102、步骤2104、步骤2201、步骤2204中的显示操作、步骤2206、步骤2207、步骤2209、步骤2210中的显示操作和/或用于本文所描述的技术的其它过程。输入单元可以是触摸屏或其他硬件或硬件与软件的综合体。The display unit 2401 is configured to support an electronic device to perform the display operations and steps in steps 1701, 1704, 1902, 2002, step 2003, step 2102, step 2104, step 2201, and step 2204 in the foregoing method embodiment. The display operations in 2206, step 2207, step 2209, step 2210, and / or other processes for the techniques described herein. The input unit may be a touch screen or other hardware or a combination of hardware and software.
输入单元2402,用于接收用户在电子设备的显示界面上的输入,如触摸输入,语音输入,手势输入,悬浮操作等,输入单元2402用于支持电子设备执行上述方法实施例中的步骤1702、步骤1901、步骤2001、步骤2101、步骤2202、步骤2205、步骤2208和/或用于本文所描述的技术的其它过程。输入单元2402可以是触摸屏或其他硬件或硬件与软件的综合体。The input unit 2402 is configured to receive a user's input on the display interface of the electronic device, such as touch input, voice input, gesture input, hover operation, etc. The input unit 2402 is configured to support the electronic device to perform step 1702 in the above method embodiment. Step 1901, step 2001, step 2101, step 2202, step 2205, step 2208, and / or other processes for the techniques described herein. The input unit 2402 may be a touch screen or other hardware or a combination of hardware and software.
确定单元2403,用于支持电子设备执行上述方法实施例中的步骤1703、步骤2203和/或用于本文所描述的技术的其它过程。The determining unit 2403 is configured to support the electronic device to perform steps 1703, 2203, and / or other processes used in the techniques described herein.
进一步的,如图24所示,该电子设备还可以包括:划分单元2404。Further, as shown in FIG. 24, the electronic device may further include a dividing unit 2404.
划分单元2404,用于支持电子设备执行上述方法实施例中的步骤1801、步骤2103、步骤2204中的划分操作、步骤2210中的划分操作和/或用于本文所描述的技术的其它过程。The dividing unit 2404 is configured to support the electronic device to perform step 1801, step 2103, step 2204, division operation in step 2210, and / or other processes used in the techniques described herein.
其中,上述方法实施例涉及的各步骤的所有相关内容均可以援引到对应功能模块的功能描述,在此不再赘述。Wherein, all relevant content of each step involved in the above method embodiment can be referred to the functional description of the corresponding functional module, which will not be repeated here.
当然,电子设备包括但不限于上述所列举的单元模块,例如,电子设备还可以包括用于接收其他设备发送数据或者信号的接收单元,用于向其他设备发送数据或信号的发送单元等。并且,上述功能单元的具体所能够实现的功能也包括但不限于上述实例所述的方法步骤对应的功能,电子设备的其他单元的详细描述可以参考其所对应方法步骤的详细描述,本实施例这里不予赘述。Of course, the electronic device includes but is not limited to the above-mentioned unit modules. For example, the electronic device may further include a receiving unit for receiving data or signals sent by other devices, and a sending unit for sending data or signals to other devices. In addition, the functions that can be implemented by the above functional units also include, but are not limited to, the functions corresponding to the method steps described in the above examples. For detailed descriptions of other units of the electronic device, refer to the detailed description of the corresponding method steps. I will not repeat them here.
在采用集成的单元的情况下,图25示出了上述实施例中所涉及的电子设备的一种可能的结构示意图。该电子设备可以包括:处理模块2501、存储模块2502和显示模块2503。处理模块2501用于对电子设备的动作进行控制管理。显示模块2503用于根据处理模块2501的指示进行内容显示。存储模块2502,用于保存电子设备的程序代码和数据。进一步的,该电子设备还可以包括输入模块,通信模块,该通信模块用于支持电子设备与其他网络实体的通信,以实现电子设备的通话,数据交互,Internet访问等功能。In the case of using an integrated unit, FIG. 25 shows a possible structural schematic diagram of the electronic device involved in the foregoing embodiment. The electronic device may include a processing module 2501, a storage module 2502, and a display module 2503. The processing module 2501 is configured to control and manage the actions of the electronic device. The display module 2503 is configured to perform content display according to an instruction of the processing module 2501. The storage module 2502 is configured to store program codes and data of the electronic device. Further, the electronic device may further include an input module and a communication module, and the communication module is configured to support communication between the electronic device and other network entities to implement functions such as electronic device calls, data interaction, and Internet access.
其中,处理模块2501可以是处理器或控制器。通信模块可以是收发器、RF电路或通信接口等。存储模块2502可以是存储器。显示模块可以是屏幕或显示器。输入模块可以是触摸屏,语音输入装置,或指纹传感器等。The processing module 2501 may be a processor or a controller. The communication module may be a transceiver, an RF circuit, or a communication interface. The storage module 2502 may be a memory. The display module may be a screen or a display. The input module may be a touch screen, a voice input device, or a fingerprint sensor.
当处理模块2501为处理器,存储模块2502为存储器,显示模块2503为触摸屏时,本实施例所提供的电子设备可以为图3所示的电子设备。其中,上述通信模块不仅可以包括RF电路,还可以包括Wi-Fi模块、NFC模块和蓝牙模块。RF电路、NFC模块、Wi-Fi模块和蓝牙模块等通信模块可以统称为通信接口。其中,上述处理器、RF电路、触摸屏和存储器可以通过总线耦合在一起。When the processing module 2501 is a processor, the storage module 2502 is a memory, and the display module 2503 is a touch screen, the electronic device provided in this embodiment may be the electronic device shown in FIG. 3. The communication module may include not only an RF circuit, but also a Wi-Fi module, an NFC module, and a Bluetooth module. Communication modules such as RF circuits, NFC modules, Wi-Fi modules, and Bluetooth modules can be collectively referred to as communication interfaces. The processor, the RF circuit, the touch screen, and the memory may be coupled together through a bus.
如图26所示,本实施例还提供了一种电子设备,该电子设备可以包括:触摸屏2601,其中,所述触摸屏2601可以包括触敏表面2606和显示屏2607;一个或多个处理器2602;存储器2603;以及一个或多个计算机程序2604,上述各器件可以通过一个或多个通信总线2605连接。其中该一个或多个计算机程序2604被存储在上述存储器2603中,并被配置为被该一个或多个处理器2602执行,该一个或多个计算机程序2604包括指令,在一些实施例中,上述指令可以用于执行如图17及相应实施例中电子设备执行的各个步骤。在其他一些实施例中,上述指令还可以用于执行图18及相应实施例中电子设备执行的各个步骤。在另外一些实施例中,上述指令还可以用于执行图19及相应实施例中电子设备执行的各个步骤。在另外一些实施例中,上述指令还可以用于执行图20及相应实施例中电子设备执行的各个步骤。在另外一些实施例中,上述指令还可以用于执行图21及相应实施例中电子设备执行的各个步骤。在另外一些实施例中,上述指令还可以用于执行图22及相应实施例中电子设备执行的各个步骤。当然,电子设备包括但不限于上述所列举的器件,例如,上述电子设备还可以包括射频电路、定位装置、传感器等等,当电子设备包含有其他的器件时,上述电子设备可以为图3所示的电子设备。As shown in FIG. 26, this embodiment further provides an electronic device. The electronic device may include: a touch screen 2601, wherein the touch screen 2601 may include a touch-sensitive surface 2606 and a display screen 2607; and one or more processors 2602. Memory 2603; and one or more computer programs 2604, each of which may be connected through one or more communication buses 2605. The one or more computer programs 2604 are stored in the memory 2603, and are configured to be executed by the one or more processors 2602. The one or more computer programs 2604 include instructions. In some embodiments, the above The instructions may be used to perform various steps performed by the electronic device as shown in FIG. 17 and corresponding embodiments. In some other embodiments, the foregoing instructions may also be used to execute steps performed by the electronic device in FIG. 18 and the corresponding embodiments. In other embodiments, the foregoing instructions may also be used to perform steps performed by the electronic device in FIG. 19 and corresponding embodiments. In other embodiments, the foregoing instructions may also be used to perform steps performed by the electronic device in FIG. 20 and corresponding embodiments. In other embodiments, the foregoing instructions may also be used to execute steps performed by the electronic device in FIG. 21 and the corresponding embodiments. In other embodiments, the foregoing instructions may also be used to execute steps performed by the electronic device in FIG. 22 and corresponding embodiments. Of course, the electronic device includes but is not limited to the above-listed devices. For example, the above-mentioned electronic device may further include a radio frequency circuit, a positioning device, a sensor, and the like. When the electronic device includes other devices, the above-mentioned electronic device may be as shown in FIG. Electronic equipment shown below.
本实施例还提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,该计算机可读存储介质中包括指令,当上述指令在电子设备上运行时,使得该电子设备执行图17、图18、图19、图20、图21或图22中任一附图中的相关方法步骤,以实现上述实施例中的界面的显示方法。This embodiment also provides a computer-readable storage medium. The computer-readable storage medium includes instructions. When the instructions are run on an electronic device, the electronic device is caused to execute FIG. 17, FIG. 18, FIG. 19, and FIG. 20. The relevant method steps in any of FIG. 21, FIG. 21, or FIG. 22 to implement the interface display method in the foregoing embodiment.
本实施例还提供了一种包含指令的计算机程序产品,当该计算机程序产品在电子设备上运行时,使得该电子设备执行如图17、图18、图19、图20、图21或图22中任一附图中的相关方法步骤,以实现上述实施例中的界面的显示方法。This embodiment also provides a computer program product containing instructions. When the computer program product runs on an electronic device, the electronic device is executed as shown in FIG. 17, FIG. 18, FIG. 19, FIG. 20, FIG. 21, or FIG. 22 Relevant method steps in any of the drawings to implement the interface display method in the above embodiment.
本实施例还提供了一种控制设备,所述控制设备包括处理器和存储器,所述存储器用于存储计算机程序代码,所述计算机程序代码包括计算机指令,当所述处理器执行所述计算机指令时,所述控制设备执行如图17、图18、图19、图20、图21或图 22中任一附图中的相关方法步骤实现上述实施例中的界面的显示方法。该控制设备可以是一个集成电路IC,也可以是一个片上系统SOC。其中集成电路可以是通用集成电路,也可以是一个现场可编程门阵列FPGA,也可以是一个专用集成电路ASIC。This embodiment also provides a control device. The control device includes a processor and a memory. The memory is used to store computer program code, and the computer program code includes computer instructions. When the processor executes the computer instructions, At this time, the control device executes the related method steps in any one of the drawings such as FIG. 17, FIG. 18, FIG. 19, FIG. 20, FIG. 21, or FIG. 22 to implement the interface display method in the above embodiment. The control device can be an integrated circuit IC or a system-on-chip SOC. The integrated circuit may be a general-purpose integrated circuit, a field-programmable gate array FPGA, or an application-specific integrated circuit ASIC.
本实施例还提供了一种界面的显示装置,该装置具有实现上述方法实际中电子设备行为的功能。所述功能可以通过硬件实现,也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。所述硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的模块。This embodiment also provides an interface display device. The device has a function of realizing the behavior of an electronic device in the above method. The functions may be implemented by hardware, and may also be implemented by hardware executing corresponding software. The hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the functions described above.
其中,本实施例提供的电子设备、计算机存储介质、计算机程序产品或控制设备均用于执行上文所提供的对应的方法,因此,其所能达到的有益效果可参考上文所提供的对应的方法中的有益效果,此处不再赘述。The electronic device, computer storage medium, computer program product, or control device provided in this embodiment is used to execute the corresponding methods provided above. Therefore, for the beneficial effects that can be achieved, refer to the corresponding methods provided above. The beneficial effects in the method are not repeated here.
通过以上的实施方式的描述,所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,为描述的方便和简洁,仅以上述各功能模块的划分进行举例说明,实际应用中,可以根据需要而将上述功能分配由不同的功能模块完成,即将装置的内部结构划分成不同的功能模块,以完成以上描述的全部或者部分功能。上述描述的系统,装置和单元的具体工作过程,可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程,在此不再赘述。Through the description of the above embodiments, those skilled in the art can clearly understand that, for the convenience and brevity of the description, only the division of the above functional modules is used as an example. In practical applications, the above functions can be allocated as required. Completed by different functional modules, that is, the internal structure of the device is divided into different functional modules to complete all or part of the functions described above. For specific working processes of the system, device, and unit described above, reference may be made to corresponding processes in the foregoing method embodiments, and details are not described herein again.
在本实施例所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的系统,装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,所述模块或单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。In the several embodiments provided by this embodiment, it should be understood that the disclosed systems, devices, and methods may be implemented in other ways. For example, the device embodiments described above are only schematic. For example, the division of the modules or units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be another division manner. For example, multiple units or components may be divided. The combination can either be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not implemented. In addition, the displayed or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, which may be electrical, mechanical or other forms.
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, may be located in one place, or may be distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the objective of the solution of this embodiment.
另外,在本实施例各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。上述集成的单元既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用软件功能单元的形式实现。In addition, the functional units in the various embodiments of this embodiment may be integrated into one processing unit, or each of the units may exist separately physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit. The above integrated unit may be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of software functional unit.
所述集成的单元如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本实施例的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的全部或部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)或处理器执行各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括:快闪存储器、移动硬盘、只读存储器、随机存取存储器、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。When the integrated unit is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the technical solution of this embodiment is essentially a part that contributes to the existing technology or all or part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, which is stored in a storage medium. The instructions include a number of instructions for causing a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device) or a processor to perform all or part of the steps of the methods described in the embodiments. The foregoing storage media include: flash media, mobile hard disks, read-only memories, random access memories, magnetic disks, or optical discs, which can store program codes.
以上所述,仅为本实施例的具体实施方式,但本实施例的保护范围并不局限于此,任何在本实施例揭露的技术范围内的变化或替换,都应涵盖在本实施例的保护范围之内。因此,本实施例的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。The above description is only a specific implementation of this embodiment, but the protection scope of this embodiment is not limited to this. Any changes or replacements within the technical scope disclosed in this embodiment should be covered in this embodiment. Within the scope of protection. Therefore, the protection scope of this embodiment shall be subject to the protection scope of the claims.

Claims (17)

  1. 一种界面的显示方法,所述方法在具有触摸屏的电子设备中实现,其特征在于,所述方法包括:An interface display method, which is implemented in an electronic device with a touch screen, wherein the method includes:
    所述电子设备在所述触摸屏上显示第一应用程序的第一图形用户界面GUI,所述第一GUI包括第一子界面;The electronic device displays a first graphical user interface GUI of a first application on the touch screen, and the first GUI includes a first sub-interface;
    所述电子设备接收开启单手操作模式的操作;The electronic device receives an operation of opening a one-handed operation mode;
    响应于所述操作,所述电子设备确定投影区域,所述投影区域为用户单手操作所述电子设备时手指可触及的区域;In response to the operation, the electronic device determines a projection area, where the projection area is an area reachable by a finger when the user operates the electronic device with one hand;
    所述电子设备在所述投影区域显示第一目标界面,所述第一目标界面叠加显示在所述第一GUI之上,所述第一目标界面的内容与所述第一子界面的内容相同。The electronic device displays a first target interface in the projection area, the first target interface is superimposed and displayed on the first GUI, and the content of the first target interface is the same as that of the first sub-interface. .
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的界面的显示方法,其特征在于,所述界面的显示方法还包括:The method for displaying an interface according to claim 1, wherein the method for displaying the interface further comprises:
    所述电子设备将所述第一GUI划分为N 1个子界面,所述N 1个子界面中包括所述第一子界面。 The electronic device divides the first GUI into N 1 sub-interfaces, and the N 1 sub-interfaces include the first sub-interface.
  3. 根据权利要求1或2所述的界面的显示方法,其特征在于,所述电子设备在所述投影区域显示第一目标界面,包括:The method for displaying an interface according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the displaying, by the electronic device, a first target interface in the projection area comprises:
    所述电子设备在所述投影区域显示所述第一目标界面包括的控件。The electronic device displays controls included in the first target interface in the projection area.
  4. 根据权利要求1-3中任一项所述的界面的显示方法,其特征在于,所述界面的显示方法还包括:The method for displaying an interface according to any one of claims 1-3, wherein the method for displaying the interface further comprises:
    所述电子设备接收针对所述投影区域中的第一控件的触摸操作;Receiving, by the electronic device, a touch operation with respect to a first control in the projection area;
    响应于所述触摸操作,所述电子设备在所述触摸屏上显示所述第一应用程序的第二GUI,所述第二GUI中包括的控件数量小于预定阈值;In response to the touch operation, the electronic device displays a second GUI of the first application on the touch screen, and the number of controls included in the second GUI is less than a predetermined threshold;
    所述电子设备在所述投影区域显示至少一个控件,所述至少一个控件叠加显示在所述第二GUI之上,所述至少一个控件与所述第二GUI包括的控件一一相同。The electronic device displays at least one control in the projection area, the at least one control is superimposed and displayed on the second GUI, and the at least one control is the same as the control included in the second GUI.
  5. 根据权利要求1-4中任一项所述的界面的显示方法,其特征在于,所述界面的显示方法还包括:The method for displaying an interface according to any one of claims 1-4, wherein the method for displaying an interface further comprises:
    所述电子设备接收针对所述投影区域中的第二控件的触摸操作;Receiving, by the electronic device, a touch operation on a second control in the projection area;
    响应于所述触摸操作,所述电子设备在所述触摸屏上显示第二应用程序的第三GUI,所述第三GUI中包括的控件少于所述第一GUI中包括的控件;In response to the touch operation, the electronic device displays a third GUI of a second application on the touch screen, and the third GUI includes fewer controls than the first GUI;
    所述电子设备将所述第三GUI划分为N 2个子界面,所述N 2个子界面包括第二子界面,所述N 2小于所述N 1The electronic device divides the third GUI into N 2 sub-interfaces, the N 2 sub-interfaces include a second sub-interface, and the N 2 is smaller than the N 1 ;
    所述电子设备在所述投影区域显示第二目标界面,所述第二目标界面叠加显示在所述第三GUI之上,所述第二目标界面的内容与所述第二子界面的内容相同。The electronic device displays a second target interface in the projection area, the second target interface is superimposed and displayed on the third GUI, and the content of the second target interface is the same as that of the second sub-interface. .
  6. 根据权利要求1-5中任一项所述的界面的显示方法,其特征在于,所述第一GUI还包括第三子界面,所述界面的显示方法还包括:The method for displaying an interface according to any one of claims 1-5, wherein the first GUI further includes a third sub-interface, and the method for displaying the interface further comprises:
    所述电子设备接收在所述投影区域中的滑动操作;Receiving, by the electronic device, a sliding operation in the projection area;
    响应于所述滑动操作,所述电子设备在所述投影区域显示第三目标界面,所述第三目标界面叠加显示在所述第一GUI之上,所述第三目标界面的内容与所述第三子界面的内容相同。In response to the sliding operation, the electronic device displays a third target interface in the projection area, the third target interface is superimposed and displayed on the first GUI, and the content of the third target interface and the The content of the third sub-interface is the same.
  7. 根据权利要求2-6中任一项所述的界面的显示方法,其特征在于,The method for displaying an interface according to any one of claims 2 to 6, wherein:
    所述投影区域与所述N 1个子界面中的一个子界面所在的区域重合;或 The projection region coincides with a region where one of the N 1 sub-interfaces is located; or
    所述第一目标界面的尺寸大于所述第一子界面的尺寸;或The size of the first target interface is larger than the size of the first sub-interface; or
    所述第一子界面的显示效果与所述第一GUI中其他子界面的显示效果不同;或A display effect of the first sub-interface is different from a display effect of other sub-interfaces in the first GUI; or
    所述第一目标界面的显示效果与所述第一子界面的显示效果相同,且所述第一目标界面的显示效果与所述第一GUI中其他子界面的显示效果不同;或The display effect of the first target interface is the same as the display effect of the first sub-interface, and the display effect of the first target interface is different from that of other sub-interfaces in the first GUI; or
    所述第一目标界面的尺寸与所述第一子界面的尺寸相同,且所述第一子界面的尺寸与所述第一GUI中的其他子界面的尺寸不同;或The size of the first target interface is the same as the size of the first sub-interface, and the size of the first sub-interface is different from the sizes of other sub-interfaces in the first GUI; or
    在将所述第一GUI划分为N 1个子界面后,子界面的轮廓线叠加显示在所述第一GUI之上;或 After the first GUI is divided into N 1 sub-interfaces, outlines of the sub-interfaces are superimposed and displayed on the first GUI; or
    所述第一子界面所在的区域的操作频率高于所述第一GUI中其他子界面所在的区域的操作频率;或The operating frequency of the area where the first sub-interface is located is higher than the operating frequency of the area where the other sub-interfaces in the first GUI are located; or
    所述第一子界面包括的控件多于所述第一GUI中其他任一子界面包括的控件;或所述叠加显示是指所述第一目标界面悬浮显示在所述第一GUI之上;或The first sub-interface includes more controls than any other sub-interface in the first GUI; or the overlay display means that the first target interface is hovering and displayed on the first GUI; or
    所述叠加显示是指所述第一目标界面显示在所述第一GUI之上,且所述第一GUI做高斯模糊处理;或The superimposed display means that the first target interface is displayed on the first GUI, and the first GUI is Gaussian blurred; or
    所述N 1等于9,且所述N 2等于6。 The N 1 is equal to 9 and the N 2 is equal to 6.
  8. 一种电子设备,其特征在于,所述电子设备包括:An electronic device, characterized in that the electronic device includes:
    显示单元,用于显示第一应用程序的第一图形用户界面GUI,所述第一GUI包括第一子界面;A display unit for displaying a first graphical user interface GUI of a first application, the first GUI including a first sub-interface;
    输入单元,用于接收开启单手操作模式的操作;An input unit for receiving an operation for turning on the one-handed operation mode;
    确定单元,用于响应于所述输入单元接收到的所述操作,确定投影区域,所述投影区域为用户单手操作所述电子设备时手指可触及的区域;A determining unit, configured to determine a projection area in response to the operation received by the input unit, where the projection area is an area reachable by a finger when a user operates the electronic device with one hand;
    所述显示单元,还用于在所述投影区域显示第一目标界面,所述第一目标界面叠加显示在所述第一GUI之上,所述第一目标界面的内容与所述第一子界面的内容相同。The display unit is further configured to display a first target interface in the projection area, the first target interface is superimposed and displayed on the first GUI, and the content of the first target interface and the first sub-interface are displayed. The content of the interface is the same.
  9. 根据权利要求8所述的电子设备,其特征在于,所述电子设备还包括:The electronic device according to claim 8, further comprising:
    划分单元,用于将所述第一GUI划分为N 1个子界面,所述N 1个子界面中包括所述第一子界面。 A dividing unit, configured to divide the first GUI into N 1 sub-interfaces, and the N 1 sub-interfaces include the first sub-interface.
  10. 根据权利要求8或9所述的电子设备,其特征在于,The electronic device according to claim 8 or 9, wherein:
    所述显示单元,具体用于在所述投影区域显示所述第一目标界面包括的控件。The display unit is specifically configured to display controls included in the first target interface in the projection area.
  11. 根据权利要求8-10中任一项所述的电子设备,其特征在于,The electronic device according to any one of claims 8 to 10, wherein
    所述输入单元,还用于接收针对所述投影区域中的第一控件的触摸操作;The input unit is further configured to receive a touch operation for a first control in the projection area;
    所述显示单元,还用于响应于所述输入单元接收到的所述触摸操作,显示所述第一应用程序的第二GUI,所述第二GUI中包括的控件数量小于预定阈值,在所述投影区域显示至少一个控件,所述至少一个控件叠加显示在所述第二GUI之上,所述至少一个控件与所述第二GUI包括的控件一一相同。The display unit is further configured to display a second GUI of the first application program in response to the touch operation received by the input unit. The number of controls included in the second GUI is less than a predetermined threshold. The projection area displays at least one control, the at least one control is superimposed and displayed on the second GUI, and the at least one control is the same as the control included in the second GUI.
  12. 根据权利要求8-11中任一项所述的电子设备,其特征在于,The electronic device according to any one of claims 8 to 11, characterized in that:
    所述输入单元,还用于接收针对所述投影区域中的第二控件的触摸操作;The input unit is further configured to receive a touch operation for a second control in the projection area;
    所述显示单元,还用于响应于所述输入单元接收到的所述触摸操作,显示第二应 用程序的第三GUI,所述第三GUI中包括的控件少于所述第一GUI中包括的控件;The display unit is further configured to display a third GUI of a second application program in response to the touch operation received by the input unit, and the third GUI includes fewer controls than included in the first GUI. Controls
    所述划分单元,还用于将所述第三GUI划分为N 2个子界面,所述N 2个子界面包括第二子界面,所述N 2小于所述N 1The dividing unit is further configured to divide the third GUI into N 2 sub-interfaces, the N 2 sub-interfaces include a second sub-interface, and the N 2 is smaller than the N 1 ;
    所述显示单元,还用于在所述投影区域显示第二目标界面,所述第二目标界面叠加显示在所述第三GUI之上,所述第二目标界面的内容与所述第二子界面的内容相同。The display unit is further configured to display a second target interface in the projection area, the second target interface is superimposed and displayed on the third GUI, and the content of the second target interface and the second sub-interface The content of the interface is the same.
  13. 根据权利要求8-12中任一项所述的电子设备,其特征在于,所述第一GUI还包括第三子界面;The electronic device according to any one of claims 8-12, wherein the first GUI further includes a third sub-interface;
    所述输入单元,还用于接收在所述投影区域中的滑动操作;The input unit is further configured to receive a sliding operation in the projection area;
    所述显示单元,还用于响应于所述输入单元接收到的所述滑动操作,在所述投影区域显示第三目标界面,所述第三目标界面叠加显示在所述第一GUI之上,所述第三目标界面的内容与所述第三子界面的内容相同。The display unit is further configured to display a third target interface in the projection area in response to the sliding operation received by the input unit, and the third target interface is superimposed and displayed on the first GUI, The content of the third target interface is the same as the content of the third sub-interface.
  14. 根据权利要求9-13中任一项所述的电子设备,其特征在于,The electronic device according to any one of claims 9 to 13, wherein:
    所述投影区域与所述N 1个子界面中的一个子界面所在的区域重合;或 The projection region coincides with a region where one of the N 1 sub-interfaces is located; or
    所述第一目标界面的尺寸大于所述第一子界面的尺寸;或The size of the first target interface is larger than the size of the first sub-interface; or
    所述第一子界面的显示效果与所述第一GUI中其他子界面的显示效果不同;或A display effect of the first sub-interface is different from a display effect of other sub-interfaces in the first GUI; or
    所述第一目标界面的显示效果与所述第一子界面的显示效果相同,且所述第一目标界面的显示效果与所述第一GUI中其他子界面的显示效果不同;或The display effect of the first target interface is the same as the display effect of the first sub-interface, and the display effect of the first target interface is different from that of other sub-interfaces in the first GUI; or
    在将所述第一GUI划分为N 1个子界面后,子界面的轮廓线叠加显示在所述第一GUI之上;或 After the first GUI is divided into N 1 sub-interfaces, outlines of the sub-interfaces are superimposed and displayed on the first GUI; or
    所述第一子界面所在的区域的操作频率高于所述第一GUI中其他子界面所在的区域的操作频率;或The operating frequency of the area where the first sub-interface is located is higher than the operating frequency of the area where the other sub-interfaces in the first GUI are located; or
    所述第一子界面包括的控件多于所述第一GUI中其他任一子界面包括的控件;或The first sub-interface includes more controls than any other sub-interface in the first GUI; or
    所述第一目标界面的尺寸与所述第一子界面的尺寸相同,且所述第一子界面的尺寸与所述第一GUI中的其他子界面的尺寸不同;或The size of the first target interface is the same as the size of the first sub-interface, and the size of the first sub-interface is different from the sizes of other sub-interfaces in the first GUI; or
    所述叠加显示是指所述第一目标界面悬浮显示在所述第一GUI之上;或The superimposed display means that the first target interface is hovering and displayed on the first GUI; or
    所述叠加显示是指所述第一目标界面显示在所述第一GUI之上,且所述第一GUI做高斯模糊处理;或The superimposed display means that the first target interface is displayed on the first GUI, and the first GUI is Gaussian blurred; or
    所述N 1等于9,且所述N 2等于6。 The N 1 is equal to 9 and the N 2 is equal to 6.
  15. 一种电子设备,其特征在于,所述电子设备包括:一个或多个处理器、存储器、触摸屏以及一个或多个计算机程序;所述一个或多个处理器、所述存储器、所述触摸屏以及所述一个或多个计算机程序通过一个或多个通信总线连接;所述触摸屏包括触敏表面和显示屏,所述一个或多个计算机程序被存储在所述存储器中,并被配置为被所述一个或多个处理器执行;所述一个或多个计算机程序包括指令,所述指令用于执行如权利要求1-7中任一项所述的界面的显示方法。An electronic device, characterized in that the electronic device includes: one or more processors, a memory, a touch screen, and one or more computer programs; the one or more processors, the memory, the touch screen, and The one or more computer programs are connected through one or more communication buses; the touch screen includes a touch-sensitive surface and a display screen, and the one or more computer programs are stored in the memory and configured to be accessed by all The one or more processors execute the instructions; the one or more computer programs include instructions for executing the method for displaying an interface according to any one of claims 1-7.
  16. 一种计算机存储介质,其特征在于,包括计算机指令,当所述计算机指令在电子设备上运行时,使得所述电子设备执行如权利要求1-7中任一项所述的界面的显示方法。A computer storage medium, comprising computer instructions, when the computer instructions are run on an electronic device, cause the electronic device to execute the method for displaying an interface according to any one of claims 1-7.
  17. 一种计算机程序产品,其特征在于,当所述计算机程序产品在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行如权利要求1-7中任一项所述的界面的显示方法。A computer program product, characterized in that when the computer program product is run on a computer, the computer is caused to execute the method for displaying an interface according to any one of claims 1-7.
PCT/CN2018/101382 2018-08-20 2018-08-20 Interface display method and electronic device WO2020037469A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2018/101382 WO2020037469A1 (en) 2018-08-20 2018-08-20 Interface display method and electronic device
CN201880086258.4A CN111566606B (en) 2018-08-20 2018-08-20 Interface display method and electronic equipment

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2018/101382 WO2020037469A1 (en) 2018-08-20 2018-08-20 Interface display method and electronic device

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2020037469A1 true WO2020037469A1 (en) 2020-02-27

Family

ID=69592377

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2018/101382 WO2020037469A1 (en) 2018-08-20 2018-08-20 Interface display method and electronic device

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN111566606B (en)
WO (1) WO2020037469A1 (en)

Cited By (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN111399742A (en) * 2020-03-13 2020-07-10 华为技术有限公司 Interface switching method and device and electronic equipment
CN113254131A (en) * 2021-05-20 2021-08-13 北京有竹居网络技术有限公司 Page background display method and device
CN114860144A (en) * 2022-05-26 2022-08-05 北京小米移动软件有限公司 Unlocking interface control method and device of terminal equipment and terminal equipment
CN116360725A (en) * 2020-07-21 2023-06-30 华为技术有限公司 Display interaction system, display method and device
CN111399742B (en) * 2020-03-13 2024-04-26 华为技术有限公司 Interface switching method and device and electronic equipment

Families Citing this family (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN112473137B (en) * 2020-12-08 2023-11-28 网易(杭州)网络有限公司 Game object display method and device, storage medium and terminal equipment
CN113064686A (en) * 2021-03-18 2021-07-02 北京达佳互联信息技术有限公司 Interface display method and device, electronic equipment and storage medium

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN103472996A (en) * 2013-09-17 2013-12-25 深圳市佳创软件有限公司 Method and device for receiving touch in mobile device
CN106354246A (en) * 2015-07-16 2017-01-25 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Control method, device and terminal of terminal display
CN107329644A (en) * 2016-04-29 2017-11-07 宇龙计算机通信科技(深圳)有限公司 A kind of icon moving method and device

Family Cites Families (21)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US7800592B2 (en) * 2005-03-04 2010-09-21 Apple Inc. Hand held electronic device with multiple touch sensing devices
US7083342B2 (en) * 2001-12-21 2006-08-01 Griffin Jason T Keyboard arrangement
JP2008294542A (en) * 2007-05-22 2008-12-04 Nec Mobiling Ltd Portable terminal
US20100100854A1 (en) * 2008-10-16 2010-04-22 Dell Products L.P. Gesture operation input system
KR101972924B1 (en) * 2011-11-11 2019-08-23 삼성전자주식회사 Method and apparatus for designating enire area using partial area touch in a portable equipment
US10216286B2 (en) * 2012-03-06 2019-02-26 Todd E. Chornenky On-screen diagonal keyboard
CN102855056B (en) * 2012-07-09 2015-09-30 宇龙计算机通信科技(深圳)有限公司 terminal and terminal control method
CN103677556B (en) * 2012-09-24 2017-06-30 北京三星通信技术研究有限公司 The method and apparatus of quick positioning application program
CN103777881B (en) * 2012-10-24 2018-01-09 腾讯科技(深圳)有限公司 A kind of touch control device page control method and system
CN103019564B (en) * 2012-12-14 2016-04-06 东莞宇龙通信科技有限公司 Terminal and terminal operation method
CN103279294A (en) * 2013-05-02 2013-09-04 深圳市金立通信设备有限公司 Terminal operating method and terminal
CN103412725B (en) * 2013-08-27 2016-07-06 广州市动景计算机科技有限公司 A kind of touch operation method and device
CN103559041A (en) * 2013-11-18 2014-02-05 深圳市金立通信设备有限公司 Screen display method and terminal
US10649652B2 (en) * 2014-11-12 2020-05-12 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method of displaying interface of mobile device and mobile device
CN104461245A (en) * 2014-12-12 2015-03-25 深圳市财富之舟科技有限公司 Application icon management method
US10572054B2 (en) * 2016-10-28 2020-02-25 Nanning Fugui Precision Industrial Co., Ltd. Interface control method for operation with one hand and electronic device thereof
CN106681630A (en) * 2016-12-07 2017-05-17 广东小天才科技有限公司 Operation method and device of mobile terminal
CN107395797A (en) * 2017-07-14 2017-11-24 惠州Tcl移动通信有限公司 A kind of mobile terminal and its control method and readable storage medium storing program for executing
CN107515691A (en) * 2017-07-31 2017-12-26 努比亚技术有限公司 A kind of touch control display method and mobile terminal, storage medium
CN107613110A (en) * 2017-08-31 2018-01-19 努比亚技术有限公司 Method, terminal and the computer-readable recording medium that adjustment terminal interface is shown
CN108196748A (en) * 2017-12-28 2018-06-22 努比亚技术有限公司 Terminal display control method, terminal and computer readable storage medium

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN103472996A (en) * 2013-09-17 2013-12-25 深圳市佳创软件有限公司 Method and device for receiving touch in mobile device
CN106354246A (en) * 2015-07-16 2017-01-25 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Control method, device and terminal of terminal display
CN107329644A (en) * 2016-04-29 2017-11-07 宇龙计算机通信科技(深圳)有限公司 A kind of icon moving method and device

Cited By (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN111399742A (en) * 2020-03-13 2020-07-10 华为技术有限公司 Interface switching method and device and electronic equipment
CN111399742B (en) * 2020-03-13 2024-04-26 华为技术有限公司 Interface switching method and device and electronic equipment
CN116360725A (en) * 2020-07-21 2023-06-30 华为技术有限公司 Display interaction system, display method and device
CN116360725B (en) * 2020-07-21 2024-02-23 华为技术有限公司 Display interaction system, display method and device
CN113254131A (en) * 2021-05-20 2021-08-13 北京有竹居网络技术有限公司 Page background display method and device
CN114860144A (en) * 2022-05-26 2022-08-05 北京小米移动软件有限公司 Unlocking interface control method and device of terminal equipment and terminal equipment

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN111566606A (en) 2020-08-21
CN111566606B (en) 2022-07-26

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2021018067A1 (en) Floating window management method and related device
WO2020052529A1 (en) Method for quickly adjusting out small window in fullscreen display during video, graphic user interface and terminal
WO2021129326A1 (en) Screen display method and electronic device
EP4057135A1 (en) Display method for electronic device having foldable screen, and electronic device
WO2021036571A1 (en) Desktop editing method and electronic device
JP7081048B2 (en) System navigation bar display method, system navigation bar control method, graphical user interface, and electronic devices
WO2021213164A1 (en) Application interface interaction method, electronic device, and computer readable storage medium
WO2020259452A1 (en) Full-screen display method for mobile terminal, and apparatus
WO2020134869A1 (en) Electronic device operating method and electronic device
EP3846427B1 (en) Control method and electronic device
WO2021036770A1 (en) Split-screen processing method and terminal device
US20220206741A1 (en) Volume adjustment method and electronic device
WO2020024833A1 (en) Method for taking screenshot in scrolling manner, and electronic device
WO2021036585A1 (en) Flexible screen display method and electronic device
WO2020037469A1 (en) Interface display method and electronic device
WO2021063237A1 (en) Control method for electronic device, and electronic device
WO2021063098A1 (en) Touch screen response method, and electronic device
WO2021078032A1 (en) User interface display method and electronic device
WO2021008589A1 (en) Application running mehod and electronic device
WO2021082815A1 (en) Display element display method and electronic device
WO2021042878A1 (en) Photography method and electronic device
CN110609650A (en) Application state switching method and terminal equipment
WO2022228043A1 (en) Display method, electronic device, storage medium and program product
WO2022222688A1 (en) Window control method and device
WO2022228042A1 (en) Display method, electronic device, storage medium, and program product

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 18931049

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 18931049

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1